DaVinci Resolve 21: Complete Video Editing Course For Beginners (2026)

1. Introduction: You want to make videos that people actually stop and watch. But right now, you open DaVinci Resolve and have no idea where to start. Too many buttons, too many panels, you spend 2 hours editing, and it still doesn't look right. And the worst part is, you know the potential is there. You've seen what this software can do, but you don't know how to unlock it. Yet. What if someone sat next to you and shows you exactly where to click step by step. No confusing instruction, no skipping the basic, do this, than this, than this. That's exactly what this course is. We start from zero absolute zero. You learn how to edit your clip, edit your audio, clean up your audio, fix your color, and export a video that actually look professional. By the end, you won't be guessing anymore. You'll know what you are doing. DaVinci Resolve is used by YouTube creator, filmmaker, and TV editors around the world, and it's completely free to download. The only thing between you and the great videos is learning how to use it. I'll teach you that right here right now. So enroll right now, and I'll see you in the first lecture. 2. How to Download Free Copy of Davinci Resolve 21: So, to get your free copy of DwentiRsolve, we have to Google DevintRsolve, and we have to go to this link called Blackmagic design.com. This is DaventRsolve official website. We can click on it. Now we have to scroll down, and as you can see, we have DeventRsolve Dent version. We have two options right here. Either we can download the free copy of Devent Resolve, we can pay for the studio version of DentiResol that come with some advanced feature. Now let's click on this free download now, and as you can see, this window is pop up. We have the 19 complete version and we have Dent All 20 Beta version. Now, if you are using Linux, you can click on this button. If you are using MacOS, then you can click here to download Deventzol but if you are using Windows, then you might be confused right now because we have two options. We have Windows ARM and we have Windows X 86. So what is Windows ARM? Now, if you have ARM pase processor, then you can click on this button to download Deventures Al. But normal computers have X 86, so the normal user will have to click here to download DeventurOl. So I'm going to click on this button, and now we have to fill this form. Once you fill this form, we have this button called register and download. We have to click on this button. Once you click on the register and on button, your download will start shortly after you click that button. Now, if your download does not automatically start, then you can click on this button. And as you can see, now we are downloading Daventry resolve 20 Beta Version three. Now, once your download is complete, as you can see, now we have the setup of DaventRsolve. In the next lecture, we will install DaVinci Resolve. 3. How to Install | Davinci Resolve 21: Welcome back, everyone. Now, as you can see, we have the setup of Deventsol. First of all, we have to right click and we have to extract this setup. Now, once you extract your setup, we have this folder. We have to open this folder, and we have the setup of Daventry resolve. First of all, we have to refresh, and once this logo appear on the setup, we can right click and we can open this setup. Now, as you can see, the diventRsolve is now preparing to install. Now, once the extraction is complete, we have this window peer. We have to click on the button, and we have this setup. We have to check Davent Dissolve 20. Click here to install. Now we have to select this setup and we can rack this setup right here. Once this process is complete, then we can click on this next button. And as you can see, now we can click on this next button. We have to check this. Click Next. You can select your destination. You can change your destination from here and now click next and click on this Install button. And as you can see, the Divinity resolve is now installing. Now, once the installation is complete, as you can see, now we have this finish setup button. We can click on it. And as you can see, we have this message, Installation complete. Click on this Okay button, and we install DwentRsolve latest version. Now you can click here and you can search for Daventry Resolve. Open the DiVntRsolve app. And now, as you can see, we have successfully installed DeventRsolve. 4. Project Manager | Davinci Resolve 21: Welcome back, everyone. So this is the project window of Dent resolve. If you want to change your thumbnail view of projects, you can click here to change the view to ListView, or you can change your view to thumbnail view. You can also increase or lower the size of the thumbnail by using this lighter. If you want to create a new project, you can simply double click onto this untitled project, and as you can see, this window will pop up. We can do two things. We can name the project, and we can also change the location of this project. You can click onto this Create button to create a new project, or you can cancel and you can click here to create a new project. Now, as you can see, guys, we have this option Show and hide project library. If you click here, as you can see, we have this local database. You click here onto Detail, as you can see, we have these options, we can duplicate the project library. We can backup the project library. And if you want to open the location of your project library, you can click here or you can go back, right click and you can click here Open file location. Once you click on the open file location, it will take you to this destination. You can double click onto this Resolve Projects, go to the user and go to the guest and now again, go to the projects. But as you can see, guys, right now, this folder is empty. Now, as you can see, these are all my protects that I have backup. So how you can backup, you can simply copy these projects file and you can paste them in a different location. Now I'm going to select all my protects. I'm going to right click, and I'm going to copy these projects file. Now let's go back to the projects folder of DawntRsolve and we can paste these projects. And now, as you can see, all my projects are now here. You go to the DaventRsol as you can see, nothing is here. We have to refresh in order to refresh all the projects. And now as you can see, these are all my projects. Now you can also delete all your file. So I'm going to press Control A, I'm going to press Delete key. And now, as you can see, all the projects are now gone. Now if I open project window, as you can see, all the projects are still here. So we can refresh, and now they are gone. Now, this way, you can backup your project and you can paste them in a different location. Now we can click here, and now let's create a new project. So I'm going to double click onto this untitled project. Let's name this to first project, and let's create a new project. And we successfully create our first project of DaVinci Resolve. As you can see, this is the project name that we named. And if you go back to the project window, there is two method. First one is, as you can see, right here, we have the home icon at the corner of the Wind resolve. We can click on it, and as you can see, we are back in Project Window. Second way to go back to the project window is go to the file and go to the project manager. Or we can press the shortcut key, which is the Shift plus one. And as you can see, we are here in Project Window. Let's close this project window, and this time, I'm going to press Shift one. And now, boom, we are back in project window. Now we can also sort the project from here by the name, date modify, et cetera. If you want to look at the detail of your project, you can simply click onto this icon. And as you can see, we have this information. We currently have zero timeline. This is the resolution, and this is the date modify of this project. Can also create a folder. I'm going to name this to test folder. I'm going to open this folder and I'm going to create a new project inside this folder. Let's call this Test one, and I'm going to create this project. And as soon as I create a project name Test one, as you can see, the title is also updated to test one. This is your project name. Now, if you go back to the project window, as you can see, we only have Test one. We don't have the Fs project. Reason why we don't have the first project that we created is we can't really go back to the homepage. Now we are in the folder of test projects. I'm going to close my Deventusol completely, and now I'm going to open my DeventureRsolve again. Now, as you can see, guys, we are here in the homepage of project window. This is the first project, and this is the test folder. You want to copy this project to this folder, you can simply click here. Right click, you can copy this project, or you can select this project and you can click here, Copy project two, and we can select the choose folder. So I'm going to select my test folder and I'm going to say copy. And now it will copy this project into this folder. If I double click and open this folder, as you can see, we have this fors project right. Here. And as I told you earlier, we can't really go back to the homepage. We are stuck here. If you want to go back to the homepage where you have all your projects, then you have to close DentiRsolve completely and reopen it again. So this is the project window of Dent Resolve. 5. Workflow | Davinci Resolve 21: Welcome back, everyone. Now, let's understand the workflow of DawnciRsolve. Unlike other video editing software, DaventiRsolve is a different story. As you can see, we have seven pages right here. Each page perform individual task. Let's go to the media page, and let's start with the media page. Media Page, we manage all media we select the media in media pool. In Cut Page, we simply cut clips, we mix them together. In edit page, most of the editing are done in edit page, and these two pages are roughly used by all the editors. Now in Edit page, you edit all your videos, you change your property in inspector, you add effects from here. All the editings are done in Edit page. Now we have the FisionPage. FisonPage is for visual effects. If you want to add visual effects, Vafxs into your video, you can use FisionPage and FisionPage works on nodes. Now let's go to the color page. Color page, we do all the color correction, color grading, et cetera. In the Fairlight page, we do the audio editing audio adjustment, et cetera. Now let's move to the final page, which is the deliver page. In deliver page, we export the video simply. So basically, this is all the workflow of Dant resolve. 6. Media Page Introduction | Davinci Resolve 21: Welcome back, everyone. Now let's talk about the media page, which is the first page in the Vint resolve. Now in every page, you can import your media. So I'm going to show you an example. I'm going to import this video. I'm going to drag this, and I'm going to drop this in the media pool of edit page. We have this window change project frame rate. So it is asking us to change the frame rate of this project according to the video. If you want to change your frame rate according to your video, you can click on this change. If you don't want to change, then you can simply click on this down change. I'm going to select the change. Now as you can see, it import my media in Media Pool. If we go to the cut page, we have this media. In every page, you can see we have the same clip in all the media pool of all the pages. You go to the media page, we even have this clip in Media pool of the media page as well. So if you can import the video in every page of Winsve then why you need a standalone media page? Let me show you another example. This time, I'm going to import the same video in the media pool of this media page. Now, if I drag and drop this in media storage, as you can see, all the clips that are in the guide folder are available right here. So instead of going back and forth into the folder, we can simply select the media from this page. Now we have the clip number one, two, and we have multi scene clip as well. Now in the media pot in the media storage, you can also change the thumbnail view. You can change the view to list view as well. And if you right click onto your clip, as you can see, we have another option called extract Audio. Can extract any audio of any clip, and as you can see, we have the clip number one audio. We can even extract this clip audio. If you want to select multiple clip, you can right click and you can extract the audio of multiple clips. Now, the amazing part of this feature is that not even extract your audio in this media storage, but if you go back to the guide page, we also have the audio file in the guide folder as well. Can easily extract any clip audio using this method. I'm going to delete all my audio file. I'm going to select all my video, and we can select extract audio. And simply we extracted all clip audio. Now in Media Pool, we can select the media. So this is the media that we final in the media pool. This is the media data available in the folder. This is not the finalized media. This is the finalized media. So if I import this clip in the media pool, if we go to the edit page, now we have clip number two in Edit page in cut page. In every page, you will have this clip that we imported into this section. This is called the Media Pool, and this is called Media storage. Now we can do one more thing. If you go to the audio, if you check this, as you can see, guys, this is my audio level. This is clip number two Audio level. Now, if you go to the inspector, let's uncheck the audio, and I'm going to select my clip. Hey, you can do one more thing. You can zoom in, you can change all these settings. And these settings are also available in cut page right here. This is called the inspector. If you go to the Edit page, this inspector is also available right here. Now we can reset this and we can click here, and we can also change this to vertical view or to this horizontal view. Now we can also uncheck this, and now we have this big preview screen. Now in the preview window, we also have some features, like we can click here and we can drag this to the right side, to preview the clip to the right side, and we can drag this to the left side to preview the clip to the left side. Now here we have the audio, we can mute or we can unmute the audio. If you want to preview your clip in a loop, you can simply click here and you can play the video. And it will play this video in a loop. If you want to select a particular part of this video, you can simply, for example, from this section, I want to select my video, so I'm going to press I on the keyboard. And to this part, I want to trim this section of my video. So I'm going to simply press O on the keyboard. And as you can see, we simply have this part of this video. And now we can rag and rope this video, and now we have a different clip. And as you can see, we trim this clip inside the media Pool preview page. Now right here, we have source option. We have the audio track, and we have annotations. So the source, this is the video. If you go to the audio, you can preview the audio. And if you go to the annotation, I'm going to switch to the source, and now we can select annotation. Can mark anything on your video. So for example, if you are explaining something about this video, you can draw that part, and it will mark this drawing. So now go to the next frame. We can also use these shapes. We have rectangle. I'm going to draw this rectangle right here. We have another mark which is called Mark two. If you go to the first mark, this is mark one. This is where we mark this circle, and this is where we mark this rectangle. Can highlight something in your video. If you are explaining someone, we also have this arrow as well, and you can also change the color of these shapes. I'm going to select this brush, and as you can see, we can draw, and we can also have this arrow right here. Let's change the color to yellow, and now we have this arrow in yellow. Now if you want to delete all the shapes, you can simply right click onto a shape and you can remove all the markers. And now we removed all the markers. 7. Smart Bin | Davinci Resolve 21: A. Welcome back, everyone. Now we are going to use the smart pin. So what are these for? Well, I'm going to change my view, first of all, to list view. And as you can see, every single video has its own frame rate, resolution, duration, and video codet et cetera. Now, what if you want to separate the videos based on the frame rate? Well, instead of selecting each and separate it, we can use the Smartpen. If you go to the collection, it will show us all the videos that you have in your media pool. And we can right click, we can add a smart Bin folder. Now I'm going to separate all my videos that contain 60 FPS. So I'm going to type the folder name 60 FPS. We can select the media pool properties. We can click here and if you scroll down, short frame rate. So these are the frame rate. Now the frame rate is one, this one or this one. You can select your frame rate from here, and as you can see, as soon as I select my frame rate, it shows all the videos that contain the frame rate. Now, you can also click here and you can select I no. So now, it shows all the videos that does not have 60 FPS. So this way, you can easily separate your media. I'm going to select is and I'm going to create a folder, and this folder will only contain the videos that has sixtyFps. Now I'm going to create another folder and I'm going to call this folder 720 P. Now if you click here, as you can see, we have so many properties. You can separate your videos according to these properties, so I'm going to scroll down, and let's see where we have the resolution. Now we have this resolution. I'm going to click here. So we have to define the resolution. So I'm going to 12 80 x 720. This is a 720 P resolution. As you can see, if you look at the resolution, all the clips are it has 720 P. Now we also have this option. We can select this option, and now if you check, all the videos are greater or less than 720 P, but not 720 B. So I'm going to separate my videos according to 720 P. Click Create. So now we have separate 60 FPS videos. We have separated 720 B videos. Now I'm going to create one last folder. So right click, create a new folder. I'm going to call this folder duration, ten sec. Now I'm going to select the file, select duration, TC. And now we can define duration. You can say, Hey, I want to add clips that have ten second duration, and as you can see, we don't have a clip that has ten second duration. So let's say we have 15, now we don't have 15. Or you can select a range. You can select shows the clip which is less than this value, and as you can see, it shows all the clips which is less than the 50 duration. Can change the duration to 15, one, five, and as you can see, it will shows all the clips that is less than 15 second. We can select a range. You can select even the greater. And now we have all the clips which is greater than 15 second. You can also select a range, so I'm going to select a range. So I'm going to add clips which is fall in 0-10 second. Let's create. And now as you can see, if you look at the duration of every single clip, every single clip is less than ten second and greater than zero second. So this way, you can easily manage your media and you can arrange your media in different folder according to the properties. Now, let's say you want to change your mind and you don't want 720 P videos in this folder. You want all the videos other than 720 P. So how can you edit this folder? We can right click, go to the edit and as you can see, we can rename this folder too not 720 P. And now we can also change this to the resolution which is not 720 P. And if we click Okay, as you can see, guys, now we have all the videos other than 720 P video. 8. Relink Media | Davinci Resolve 21: Welcome back, everyone. So what if you lost your media and you want to relink your media? Let me show you what I mean. I'm going to right click and I'm going to cut this clip, and I'm going to change this clip destination. Now we have a new folder and we have a new location. I'm going to paste this clip. Now, if you go to the media pool, as you can see, all the clips are turned red. And we have this icon turn on called Relink. Now if you remember, we use auto scene detection to cut this clip from one multi scene clip. So we have to select that clip. We have to relink that clip to this clip. So to do that, we have to click here, and as you can see, we have to select the location of the missing clip. I'm going to select Locate. Now this is a new destination of that missing clip. We can select the folder. As soon as we select the folder, it re linked that main clip to these individual clips. Now I'm going to also embod these clips and let's cut these clips, change the clip location. Now we have this new destination, and as you can see, these clips are also turn red, which means we have missing links of these clips. And this turn on red reilin media, we can click on it. We can go to the Locate and we can select the new destination, select the folder Boom, we relink all these media. 9. Scene Detection | Davinci Resolve 21: Welcome back, everyone. So most of the editing consists cutting and mixing clips together. What if I told you in media page, we have a feature that can automatically detect scene for you. Let me show you what I mean. If you right click onto a multi scene clip, first of all, I'm going to preview this clip. You can also preview a clip by hovering the mouse from left to right, or from right to left, like this. As you can see in this clip, we have multiple scenes. Now I'm going to automatically cut out the scene. So if you want to do that, right click onto multi scene clip, and as you can see, we have this feature called scene cut detection. We can select this now in scene card detection, right here, we have a big preview screen, and we also have this small screen. So what are the screen? Well, this screen represent your previous frame, and this scene represent your next frame. So I'm going to first of all, select this auto scene detect, and it will automatically detect where we have a different scene, and it will edit these cuts. Now, as you can see, we are inside the first scene. That is why we have the same thumbnail. If we go to the next scene, this is the same story. But if you are in between, if you are on the green line, as you can see, we have the first scene, and right here, we have the next scene. If we go to this line, now this is the previous scene, and this is the next scene. Now for some reason, if it mis detect a scene, you can simply delete a line. So for example, I'm going to select this line. I'm going to delete this. And as you can see, it delete this selection. And you can also select the scene from here. I'm going to again delete all the scenes. You can also select the scene from here and now we can delete all these scenes. Let's select this one, delete this. And now again, auto detect scene. Now we have these scenes. So we have five scene. We have one have two, three, four, and we have five. Now to edit these cut into your final video, we have to click here, add cuts to Media Pool. And now, if we click here, it will again ask us to change the frame rate according to the clip. Let's change. And now, if you close this window, now we have five individuals seen instead of one video. So if scene detection does not detect your clip cut automatically, then you can also cut them manually. So I'm going to right click and I'm going to select scene cut detection. Now we have this window First of full, I'm going to auto scene detect and it automatically add cut in my video. Now, what if it miss detects some cut? So in that case, we can also click onto this button which is add. And if I click on it, as you can see, now we have this screen line, we add a cut manually. So now I'm going to place my play head right here at a cut. You cannot place it right here at a cut, and as you can see, we are adding manually cut. And if I click onto this button, and now if we close this window, as you can see, these are the manual cuts that we added. So you can also manually add cuts in your video. 10. Clone Tool | Davinci Resolve 21: Welcome back, everyone. Now in the media page, we also have a feature called Clone Tool, and it will help us to clone videos from one destination to another. So as you can see, this is our current destination. I'm going to first of all, click here to Enable the Clone tool and we can add a new job. Now we can drag this folder to the source folder, and we have to drag and drop the folder of the destination. Now if we go to the guide, I have this folder called New, and this is my new destination. So I'm going to drag and rob this to the destination folder. Now I'm going to click on this clone and if we clone all the videos from this folder and copy and pay this file to this new destination folder. If we double click and open this folder, now we have all the three videos right here. So by doing this, you can backup your file. You can clone your file from one location to another. 11. Cut Page Introduction: Hey. Welcome back, everyone. Now let's go to the next page, which is called Cut Page. Before we go to the cut page, I'm going to import this file in Media pool so that we can access this file in Cut page. Now let's go to the cut page. And first of all, I'm going to import my clip number one in the timeline of Cut page. You can drag your clip to here or you can drag your clip right here. This is a timeline of Cut page. You can pVw your clip by dragging the timeline. You can click here onto this number. Press your click, hold it. You can drag this timeline to the right side or to the left side like this. If you want to freely move this line, which is called player head, it represents the current frame. You can simply click here and you can uncheck fixed play head. And now as you can see, we can fly move this play head. Now I'm going to check Fix playhead. This is the preview screen of the cut page. You can play your clip like we do in the media page. You can also preview your clip like this. If you want to fast forward your clip, you can also click here and it will fast forward your clip. You can stop your clip from here. Now we also have the property of this clip. In divintsol we call this inspector. If you select your clip, if you go to the inspector, if you enable this, as you can see, we have transform cropping, et cetera. Now, these properties, these inspector are also available on the previous screen. You click here, as you can see, this is a transform. We can control the transform. And if I zoom out and zoom in, these values are also changing. Now let's zoom in, and as you can see, these property are changing. If I change the position, the position is also changing. You can rotate your clip like this. You can use this slider as well. If you want to reset all the values, simply click here. If you want to reset a particular value, for example, if I change my position, if I zoom out, and now if you want to only reset a particular value like position, we can simply reset the position value. And now it is resetting only the position value. If you want to reset all the values in transform, we can click here. Now if you unable crop, we have crop onto the previous screen. We can enable or disable the crop. You can click here. And as you can see, we have this line. We can simply crop the video like this. Let's reset this. We also have dynamic Zoom, composite, et cetera. All these inspector are available on preview screen. Let's hire the inspector and let's disable the inspector. Is a new update. Now we can also record the audio cut page as well. So I'm going to go to the first frame. You can also simply use this playhead like in this area to move in timeline as well. Now I'm going to click here, and as you can see, guys, we have this audio level. If you click here, as you can see, we have these options. If you want a three second countdown, you can enable this. If you want a five second countdown, you can enable this or if you don't want a countdown, then you can select this. Now to record a audio, simply click here. And as you can see, it is now recording my audio. We can stop the audio, and now as you can see, we can do a voiceover inside a Cut page from now on. I'm going to select my audio and I'm going to press Backspace to delete this audio. Let's disable this. Now in cut page timeline, if you only want the video, only you can click here and you can drag any clip. I'm going to drag this clip right here. And as you can see, it will only shows the video of this clip. Going to disable this, and now I'm going to enable audio only. And now this time it will only insert the audio of this clip. You can import the audio in this small timeline, and as you can see this time it only import the audio of this clip. If you want to import both, simply disable both, and it will import audio plus video as well. Now I'm going to select this clip press backspace, select the Audio press backspace. Now let's talk about these tracks. If you right click, you can delete a track. You can also add a video track, or if you click A, you can also add or delete an audio track as well. I'm going to drag my second clip on top of this clip, and as you can see, we have this disabled track. If you click here, if you check this, it will disable this track. Now you can really view this track in preview screen. If you uncheck this, it will enable this track. If you want to mute this track, you can click here and it will mute this track. Now as you can see, the audio track is too narrow, we can't really see it. If you want to enlarge the audio track in the cut page, you can simply click here, and it will enlarge the audio track. Now we can clearly see the waveform of the audio of this clip. 12. Import Tool | Different Tool to Import Media: Welcome back, everyone. So in cut page to import media, we have import tools. Let's talk about these tools. First of all, I'm going to import my media, my first clip. Let's talk about this tool first. Place on top. Now, what it does if you are in the middle or if you are at the starting point of your clip, it will place your media on top of your current clip. But if you are at the end, then it will place your video after your first clip. Let me show you. I'm going to select my second clip, and as you can see, I am at the end of my first clip. If I select place on top, it will place my video after my first clip. But if you change your position like in the middle, now if you select place on top, it will place your video on top of your first clip. And same if you are at the starting point and if you select your second clip and select place on top, it will also place your video on top of your first clip. Now let's delete this clip by selecting and pressing backspace. Now let's talk about this MAT insert. You want to import a video in between two clips like we have clip number one, we have clip number two, then you can use Smart Insert. I'm going to select my multi scene clip, and I'm going to select Smart Insert. And as you can see it import my video in between these two clips. We can also drag this and we can drop this right here between these two. We can also select this clip press backspace to delete this clip. If you want to remove this empty space, you can also select the empty space and press backspace to delete the empty space. Now let's talk about this called append. Basically, it just import your clip. I'm going to select my first clip, append and boom, it import my clip after all the clips. For example, let's move to the first clip, and I'm going to select my second clip, and I'm going to select append and boom, it will import this after all my clips. If you want to import your media after all the clips, then use append. We are at the starting point, and if you import the third clip using the Ripple overwrite, it will override the first clip, and it will import your new clip. So for example, I'm going to this time select my clip number one, and I'm going to use Ripple overt. It will delete the first clip, and it will import my second clip. Now we have next tool, which is very interesting called close up. If you want a close up of a scene, for example, I want this close up, so I'm going to select this clip. I'm going to click on this closeup. And as you can see, it just zoom in your clip a little bit. If we go to the inspector, as you can see, you can also control the zoom in and zoom out. Now we have the closeup of this scene. Let's select this press backspace. By the way, you can also lock your track and you can't really move this track. So if you have some clips that you don't want to move, then you can simply lock your track. This way, you can't really move your track. As you can see, I can move this track, but I can't really move this track. So let's unlock this and now we can freely move this track. Spread back space. Now as you can see, we have this space called ripple. This is the empty space. If you automatically delete the space. So for example, now we have extra empty space. If you automatically delete these ripples, these empty spaces, you can simply click here and you can select ripple on this time, if I delete this, as you can see, now we don't have the ripple. If I trim this clip, as you can see, the second clip is now fixed at the end of my first clip. Now if I uncheck this, now, if I trim this, as you can see, now we have the empty space. Let's delete the empty space and let's enable ripple on. Now let's move on to the final which is called source overwrite. And what it does, it does import your clip on top of all the clips. So for example, I'm going to import this clip using the source over. It will import my clip at the starting point. It will override this track and it will create a separate new track. Again, we can select clip number two, use the source over and boom, select clip number one, source over, and now check this out. Will override these sources and it will import a clip into a new track instead of importing them on top or overrating them overall. So these are the import tool that we have in CAT page. 13. Sync Bin | Sync Multiple Clips: Welcome back, everyone. So what if you have multi angle camera shots and you want to combine them? Well we have an interesting feature in Cut page that we call sync pin. First of all, I'm going to import these three videos. Now let's go to the Cut page. And as you can see, if I select this video, all these video are from a different camera angle. Okay. Now, what if you have an interview and you want to combine these three together and you want to select a particular camera shot. So now, first of all, what we need to do is I'm going to select all my videos plus the audio that I have recorded using this microphone. I'm going to select this called Sync clip. Let's click here. And as you can see, we have this window pop up. Right here, we can sink by the time code or we can sink in and out, or we can sync using the audio. This one is the best option because by using the audio, it will sync all these clips. And if you can notice guys in the audio waveform, as you can see, we can clearly see that the clips when I was talking is starting from this point in every single clip. Now I'm going to select the audio, and now let's click onto this button called Auto Sync. Once you click on it, it will sync your videos like this. Now as you can see, guys, we have these three camera angle combined. Now we can click on this save sync and boom. It sync all the clips. As you can see, we have even the icon of sync on top of these clips. Now simply go to the sync bin and now check this out. This is camera number three, and now if we go forward, this is camera number two. I press thecord button. And now when I press the coord button on camera number one, which is my main camera, now it turn on. Check this out. Now I'm sitting at the same time. And when I was speaking, we have the audio right here. So now I'm going to select my audio first. Let's click here to select the audio and we can select the whole audio. So now I'm going to drag this and drop this in the timeline or we can use one of these import tool. So I'm going to use this place on top. And now we have the whole audio of these cameras. Now we can go to the starting point and as you can see if I go to any point in my audio, it will also move in the timeline of the sin bin. So for example, let's go to this starting point, and I want to select my main camera or just select camera number two because I'm looking at the camera number two. I'm going to select the camera number two. As you can see, it also select a portion of my video. So we can also drag these points to left to right, to select the video, and we can also select the point as well. Now we can also close a camera if you don't want to select that camera. I'm going to close this. Let's click here, and now we are back to the homepage of this sync pin. Now I'm going to select Tamer number two. I'm going to drag and rob this or we can just use this place on top. Now check this out. Have camera number two. And to this point, I'm looking at camera number three. So I'm going to select my camera number three. Let's use place on top. Now, let's go back. At this time, I'm looking at camera number one, so I'm going to select Camera number one, place on top. Now, you may be wondering we are adding layers of layers of videos. So how can we organize the track? If you drag clip in the starting point, we have this icon. You can drag this icon and you can drag this to the right side to trim the clip, or you can select Aclip. You can drag the end part to the left side to trim the clip as well. Now instead of trimming the clip one by one, we can do one more thing. Instead of working with multiple tracks, we can organize these clips in a single track. So if you select your clip and you can drag your clip below this layer, as you can see, it is overwriting this clip. So if I drag this, as you can see, it overwrite the first clip. So we lodge the first clip. I'm going to press Control Z to undo my action. We can drag this in this empty space, so it won't override the for clip. Now I'm going to drag this again, and it is overwriting my first clip, so I'm going to select this clip and drag this in this empty space, so it won't override my first clip. Now, if we go to the timeline, as you can see, we are here in camera number two. So if you travel in your timeline, and as you can see, we are at the camera number two. So it is also highlighting that we are on top of the camera number two. If we go to the next clip, which is camera number three, by the way, it is also highlighting that. Of now we are here in camera number one. Now, it shows the camera angle that is on top of all the tracks. So as you can see, we also have the audio, which it defined the audio as camera number four, but it is not highlighting the camera number four. The reason behind why it is not highlighting is because the camera number one is on top of this camera angle. Now, if we go to the endpoint where we don't have any clip on top of the audio, as you can see, now it is highlighting the audio as camera number four. Now one more important thing. If you want to get out from this window, which is the multicam, you can simply click here, which is the source tape. We have the source. You can select a single source. You can also go to the timeline, and as you can see currently, we don't have any clip in the timeline. We can go back to the multicam and we can go to the sync pin. As you can see, we are here in media pool, so we can go back to the sync pin. For example, if you select this time camera number one, which we don't have the footage right now. So let's go to the point where we have the camera number one. I'm going to select my camera number one and we can just select this place on top. Now, if we go to the timeline, we have the clip. If we go to the multicam, we have the same clip. So if you want to multicam, you have to go back to the sink Bin. And if you want to get out from the sync Bin, simply, you can go to the media pool, and now we are back to the media pool. 14. Cut and Mix Clips: Welcome back, everyone. So now let's talk about the most important part of video editing is cutting and mixing clips together. First, I'm going to drag my first clip in timeline, and if you drag your cursor at the endpoint, you can trim the starting point. Or if you select your clip, you can drag the end part like this. In the small timeline, we can also do this like this. Now, for example, if you trim the starting point, let's say we trim the starting point and you want to move your clip. So now we lost the starting point. So you can drag this symbol. So as you can see, we have this symbol, you can click here. You can click and you can drag your clip to the right side. And as you can see, it is revealing that we are dragging this part of the video inside this video track. So we can also trim the end part of this clip. And now, as you can see, we have this empty space. We can select this icon, and as you can see, we can move this to the left side or to the right side. So after we trim this clip, we can also select what the part of the video that we want to keep in this video track. Now, what if you want to split your clip in two pieces? Well, as you can see, we have this tool called split clip. If we click on it, it will split these clips. As you can see, now we have two clips. We have clip number one and we have clip number two because we split this clip into two pieces. If you want to split a clip into two pieces, you can use this tool. Now instead of selecting this tool from here, you can also use the shortcut key, which is the Control B. If you want to add a cut right here, you can simply just press Control B and now check this out. Now as you can see, we split this clip in three pieces. Now I'm going to show you how we can add J and LCAT. I'm going to first of all, press Control A, delete this clip. I'm going to drag my second clip in timeline and I'm going to select my first clip and I'm going to select a pent, so it will import the video after the first clip. Now as you can see, we have the first clip and we have the second clip. This is just simply mixing two clips together. Now, the JCAt is defined. Your video come second and your audio come first. What does this mean? First of all, I'm going to click here to enlarge my audio track. I'm going to select my audio, and now I'm going to move this audio. So I'm going to place my video like this, and now I'm going to place my audio right here and I'm going to select this point between two clips, and I'm going to track this right here. Now I'm going to select my audio and I'm going to simply just track my audio like this. Now if we play the video, the video comes second and the audio come first. Now as you can see, it is making the shape of J because the audio come first and the video comes second. That is why we call this JCut. Now if I play my clip, as you can see, the audio come first and the video comes second. Now if you want to add cut in your video, you can simply just track this audio right here and you can drag your video like this. And as you can see, it is making the shape of L. That is why we call this Alcut. In the Alcat the video come first and the audio comes second. Now if I play this clip, as you can see, the video come first and after the video shows, we have the audio. So this is basically called the JN LCAT, which is a very famous cut in video editing. It grab the viewer attention. It creates a cinematic mood for your videos. 15. How to Add Transitions: Welcome back, everyone. Now, I'm going to show you how we can use transition in cut pig. First, let's drag two clips in timeline, and let's go to the point where we have the first clip ending and the second clip is starting, which is between point. Now, this is the between point of two clips. Now this is where you want to add transition. So let's go to the transition folder. And first thing that you want to use is your mouse cursor. If you want to preview a transition, you can just simply move your cursor on top of a transition that you want to add, and you can drag your mouse from left to right to preview this transition. Some transition took longer to load. On the other hand, simple transition will preview faster. So for example, these are some fusion transition, and if I hover my mouse onto this transition or maybe this one, some transition will took longer to preview. Now to add a transition, simply drag and drop that transition between your clips. But as you can see, it is not adding the transition because we don't have enough room for this transition to work. So in order for this transition to work, we have to trim the clip, and now if we add a transition, it will only add the transition at the end of this clip. And if we preview this, now we have this transition. We can also select this transition and we can press backspace to delete that transition. I'm going to also trim my second clip, and now I'm going to add this transition. And this time, as you can see it will add this transition on both clip. Now you can also change your duration of your transition by selecting the left or right corner and you can drag your transition like this to make it shorter or to make the transition longer. Now we have this transition point where you can just simply drag this to also make your transition look smaller or make it a bigger transition. And now, as you can see, we have this transition. You can also select your transition, go to the inspector, and right here, we can also customize this transition. So for example, we can add the border. We can also change the color of the border like this. Let's make it maybe this one, click Okay. Now you can also change your alignment. If you want to add on the first clip, you can also select this or if you want to add this to the second clip, it will shift your transition to the second clip or you want to add the transition between both clips. Now we also have this feature called the audio, and it will also add the transition between your audio. So for example, we can fade in the audio, so I'm going to select minus three DB, and it will add this fade in and fade out. And now if I play my clip, as you can see, we have this transition. We also adding the transition on the audio as well. Let's drop this click. Now, if you want to change your transition type, you can also select your transition type and you can change your transition type. You want a heart. You can also select that shape. Maybe you want to select this push you will get. This type of transition, you can also add this motion blur. Let's preview this is before. And let's add this motion blur, 0.5, and now this is after. Check this out. So this was before and now this is after So it will make your transition look better. We also have a separate transition for audio as well, and you can simply go to the audio. From here, you can see we have this audio, but the best way to use the transition is to select the audio. You can also disable the audio if you want, or you can also disable the video, and you can apply this transition on only the audio of these clips. So this is how you can add transition between your clips in the cart page. 16. Effects and Titles: Welcome back, everyone. Now let's talk about the titles and effects in CUT page. To add the effect, simply go to the effects folder. These are all the effects. These are simple effects, and we have fusion effects, resolve effects, et cetera. Now to add any effects onto a particular clip, for example, if you only want to add effect on top of the first clip, just select an effect. For example, I'm going to select this box blur maybe we can select this Zombler. I'm going to apply this effect on top of this clip, so drag and drop your effect onto a particular clip. If you want to control this effect, simply go to the inspector, and as you can see in effects section, we can control this effect. If you have a transition onto your clips, you can also go to the transition and you can also control your transition. Now, go to the effects, and as you can see, we can customize this effect. We can play around with the amount. We can play around with the center exclusion. Let's add this effect. You can also play around with the channel like we can make this like a glitch effect. Now check this out. We have this effect. Now, for example, if you want to add effect on top of all the clips, if you want one effect to work on all the clips instead of dragging and drop that effect on top of every single clip that you have, you can just select this adjustment layer on top of all the videos, and we can increase the duration by dragging the end point all the way to the final point. Now we have the adjustment layer. I'm going to add a different effect. This time, I'm going to add this vignette effect. So I'm going to drag and drop this effect on top of the adjustment layer. And now if I preview the clip, we have the vignette effect on top of the first clip, and we also have the vignette effect on top of the second clip. Even on top of the transition as well because this is an adjustment layer, and adjustment layer work on all the tracks. You can also trim this if you only want to add that effect, if you want to add only maybe the near effect on top of the first clip, then you can simply just trim this according to the duration of your first clip. And after the first clip, your clip will end like this. So this way, it will only effect your first clip. If you want to effect the second clip as well, you can increase the duration, and now we have this effect effecting all the clips underneath this track. We can also go to the inspector and we can play around with the Vineyard size as well. Now check this out. Let's change the color to white and let's lower the size and maybe we can increase the nmorphism. Now we are good to go. Now we add effect. Now let's go to the titles, and I'm going to add a title. First of all, if you go to the titles, as you can see, we have the lower third, you can preview your title by hovering your mouse cursor from left to right. We even have the animated title, so I'm going to scroll down. As you can see, we can hover the mouse from left to right and you will get the title preview like this. I'm going to use this title, so I'm going to drag and drop this on top of all the clips. Let's make this a five second. To customize your title, simply select your title and go to the inspector. If you want to replace the text, you can type in box. I'm going to type forest. You can even change the label color, so we are in forest, so I'm going to change the color to maybe green. You can also make your banner darker or maybe you can make it brighter. So according to the theme, I want to make my banner a bit darker. So click Okay and check this out. We have this animated title. Now, check this out. Now you can also add simple title. For example, let's go to the titles, and as you can see, these are lower third titles. So let's go to the second clip, and I'm going to add this lower third title. Now we can trim this. Let's make this shorter. We can select the clip. We can change the color to black. So this is the title I'm going to type Ocean. This is the second. Now we can scroll down, and you can also add the drop shadow, increase the opacity of drop shadow, and let's add this as a background. Let's play around with the slider, and now we are good. Now, as you can see, guys, we add this title as well. Now, if you notice we have a keyframe feature as well. So in the next lecture, we will animate this title. 17. Keyframe in Cut Page: Welcome back, everyone. Now, if you remember, in the previous lecture, we add this lower third title. This time we will animate this title. So to animate this title, first, we have to select the title and go to the inspector. Now, in inspector, if you notice we have two settings, we have the simple settings where you will have the transform, cropping, et cetera. And in the first setting, we have the title setting. Where you can individually change each value. If you want to zoom in this title, you can just zoom in this text. If you want to just zoom in and zoom out or maybe change the position of the wave text, you can simply do that. So we can individually customize these settings. Now, if you're noticing, we have these diamond shapes, and these diamond shapes represent key frames. We can add these key frame to animate, position, zoom in and zoom out or anything that have this diamond shape. So this is how keyframe animation work. First of all, let's go to the first frame where we have this title. Now I'm going to set my Zoom value to about zero. So this is the lowest that we can get. So I'm going to set the lowest value which is 0.250. I'm going to add a keyframe. Now, if you add a keyframe from this position, we add a point, and I want my Zoom to happen to this point. So I'm going to zoom in to about 1.240. As you can see, if I play my clip from the first point where we add this dimer shape point to the second point, it will zoom in. So this is how the keyframe animation works. Now let's go to the first title, and I'm going to change the position. So I'm going to add a keyframe to this point, I'm going to reveal my text. There we go. And if I play my clip, as you can see, we have this simple text animation. Now let's animate this box as well, so we have to scroll down and we have this box. We have the outline. Maybe we can just lower the outline because it looked better without the outline. Now we can play around with the opacity, so let's add a key frame in opacity to this position, and in the final position, we can just increase the opacity about 20%. And now check this out. We have the simple lower animation. Now we can select the whole title and we can increase the duration. And let's go to the setting this time, go to the composite mode. I'm going to add a keyframe to this position, and from here to the final position, I'm going to lower my opacity to about 0%. So this way, the whole title will disappear, not the single text. Now we animate the position opacity, et cetera, but still something is missing. We have to refine the animations of this keyframe. So in order to do that, we have to go to the keyframes and right here, as you can see, we have these values. These represent the key frames that we added of each value. We added the Zoom cen of why that is why we have this keyframe onto these values. We add it for position. That is why we have the keyframe for position, and we also have opacity, background et cetera. As you can see, these are the arrow. These represent the keyframe position. If you want to go to the next keyframe, you can click here. If you want to go to the previous keyframe, you can click here. If you want to reset a keyframe, you can simply click onto this reset, but I'm not going to do that. Now to refine the animation, we have to go to the graph. So if you click here, as you can see, these are keyframe curves, we have to click here, and this is where the parameters of your video. So we have to select all videos, and I'm going to select these values, and I'm going to select this easy in. Now we can go to the video, and as you can see, it will refine all the animation of the text. And now if I play the clip, check this out. We missed the opacity, so I'm going to select the key frame for opacity, and now I'm going to select this easy in. This way, it will smooth out the animation. Now, if you want to zoom in and zoom out in this keyframe animation timeline, you can simply click here and you can use this slider. If you want a detailed Zoom, you can click here. If you want a full extend Zoom, you can click here. You can simply use your old key and use your mouse scroll to zoom in and zoom out like this. And now check this out. Now, another way to look at the keyframes is to enable these keyframes. If you enable it right here, we don't have anything. But if you select your title or your video that you animate, as you can see, the keyframes will show up like this. But the precise way to look at the keyframes is to go to the keyframe window. 18. Safe Area in Cut Page: Welcome back, everyone. Now, before you edit your clip, you have to decide where you want to export this video. So if you are making this video for mobile phone, then you have to go to the preview window and you can choose these social media guides. For example, I'm going to select this full portrait and vertical, and as you can see, it will show me the vertical view of this video. Now, if you edit this video before you select your resolution, then you are in big trouble because in my case, as you can see, I did this whole video according to the horizontal format. And if I export this video in a vertical format, most of the video will cut out from this vertical video. You have to decide it before you edit your video. If you are making video for mobile phone, then first of all, change your resolution by going to the file, going to the project settings, and you can use this vertical resolution. Now, if you click on it Save button, now we have the vertical format, and now check this out. Most of the video is now cut out from the main clip. So now we can go to the file, go to the project settings. Again, I'm going to uncheck the vertical resolution, click on the Save button. Now we are back in horizontal format. Now you can also enable the guide for center. If you want to put something in the center, you can enable this guide. This way, you can tell whether your element are in the center or not. Like we have this text perfectly aligned in the center. You can also enable for the title. As you can see, we are enabling the title, but it is not unable. So we have to select the default. And now, as you can see, now it will enable this title and action. And this way, you can align your title perfectly inside this frame. And as you can see, the lower third are inside this frame, that is why we have the perfect lower third. So don't place your title outside this window because this represent the title action, and this represents the center. So this is how you can perfectly align your videos element using this preview window guide. 19. Quick Export in Cut Page: You Welcome back, everyone. Now, how we can export the video directly from the cut page instead of going to the deliver page? Well, if you notice in the preview window, on top of the preview window, we have quick export. If you click on it, this window will pop up. You can emig the view from list to thumbnail view. You can select your resolution. If you want to export for YouTube, you can select this. But for me, I'm going to select this codect which is h264 Master. I'm going to select this if you notice we don't have the location yet where we are exporting this video, if you click on this Export, now as you can see, it will ask you for the location where you want to export this video. So I want to export this video to this new destination folder. I want to rename my file to First Export. Now we can click on this save button, and as soon as you click on it, it will export your video. Now the video is Export. If we go to the destination folder where we export this video, let's play this clip. As you can see, we have this clip. We have our first export from Cut Page. Now, by the way, you can use the Quick Export feature from the edit page right here and from the color page. But you can't really use the Quick Export from the fusion page, from the media page, and even in the Fair Light page. You can't really quick export directly from these pages. This is how you can export your videos directly from Cut Page. 20. Edit Page Introduction: Welcome back, everyone. Now let's move on to the next page which is it page. Let's click here onto the edit page, and now we are here in AdditPag. AditPage is a little bit different than the cut page. Just like the cut page, we have the inspector, we have Metadata mixer and Quick Export. Right here, we have the effects. This is a new in dit page. In dit page, the effects are organized in folders like this. We have a media pool like this. In the cut page, as you can see, we have the media Pool effects and everything. On this one window. But in edit page, we have different windows for particular things like keyframes, we have a different window for keyframes. You can disable Media Pool. You can also disable keyframe by clicking on them. If you click on Media Pool, if it is highlighted, then it means it is unable. You can view it. But if it is not highlighted in a white color, then it is disabled. You can click on it again. You can click here to enlarge your timeline, or you can click here to enlarge this folder of Media Pool. Can also select the effects. We can disable the media pool, and now we have these effects like in this enlarge window, you can click here, and now it will shrink your folder, and now it will enlarge your whole timeline. Same goes to this area. If you click here, it will enlarge this area, and if you shrink it, you can click on it again, and it will shrink this area like this. Let's enable Media pool, and let's enlarge this folder, and also I'm going to enable my effects. This is a normal interface of Edit page. So now let's import some clip. You can simply select and you can drag and drop your clip into the timeline. And as you can see, we have a video track and we have the audio track. Now, if you disable the inspector, if you notice we have this icon called Dual Viewer mode. If you click on it, we have to preview window. So what does this mean? This window will show us the clip that we have in the timeline. And this window will show the clip that we are selecting or we are previewing by hovering the mouse from right to left or left to right. You can select a clip. You can drag and drop this clip onto this window. Now, as you can see, we have this clip onto this preview window. On top of this preview window, we have two option. Either we can select this film and we can drag and drop this, and it will only import the video, not the audio. But if you select this one, it will only import the audio like this. Now, if you click here, as you can see, we have source offline, audio track, multi camera, notation, et cetera. So what are these thing? If you select the source, it will show the whole video plus the audio. You select the audio track, it will only show the audio track. If you click on the annotation, we have to switch to the source, and now we can switch to the annotation. And as you can see, we can draw something, we have the shape like we had in media page as well. You can delete this point by right click onto one point and you can remove all markers. Now all the markers are gone. We have this option called multicam. We will talk about the multicam later in the lectures. And we have another option called the offline. If you select the offline, you can't really see this preview window. But if you hover your mouse on to eclipe, now you can see this window. But after you take away your mouse cursor, it will disable this preview window. Let's switch to this source. We have this source. If you want to select a particular part in your video, you can also do that. You don't have to import the whole video. So for example, let's say I want to import my video from this area, I want to import this section of this video. So instead of importing this whole video, I can just drag this point to the right side to trim this part, and I can drag this point to the left side to trim out this whole area. Now, if I drag my video in the timeline, as you can see, it is now importing only this area, not the whole video. So it is very useful. Instead of importing the whole video in the timeline, you can trim your clip on top of this preview window. Select this video and brass delete key. Now I'm going to switch to my single screen, and I'm going to enable the inspector. Now I'm going to show you a different ways to import your clip in this edit page timeline. Now, as you can see, like the cut page, we have these import tools. But these are only three tools. So I'm going to show you how you can access all the Import tool on the preview window. So I'm going to select my video and I'm going to drag this video on top of this preview Window. And as soon as I am doing, as you can see, guys, we have the option, you can drop your video onto any option onto any import tool. So for example, I'm going to drop this to fit to full. And if I drop this, as you can see, it delete my clip and it import this video. Now this time, I'm going to select my second clip, and I'm going to drop this on top of this replace. And now it will replace the video from where we have this playhead. If you notice, if I go to the first frame, we have this video, but if we go to the further frames, we don't have this clip. The reason behind why it cut this area is because we drop this clip from this point. So, for example, I'm going to place my playhead onto this position, and if I drag and drop this clip overt, it will import this clip from this area. If you notice it don't import the audio because we don't have the audio for this clip. If we go to the dual viewer, if I drag and rob this clip, as you can see, we don't have any audio. If we go to the audio track, we don't have any audio. That is why it only import this video like this. Let's switch to this single viewer, and I'm going to delete this clip. I'm going to also delete all the clips that we have in timeline, except this one. Now I'm going to drag my first clip, and this time, I'm going to drop this onto the insert. Now I place my playhead onto this position. If I drag my clip and drop this to insert, it will insert my clip after this playhead. If we go back, as you can see, from this position, we have the first clip, and after this playhead position, we have the second clip. Can also access this tool on to this timeline. So for example, if you want to insert a clip in between this clip, you can select this. So I'm going to select my clip this one, and I'm going to click onto this insert clip. The shortcut key is F nine. I'm going to click here and as you can see, it insert this clip between this clip. It also split my clip into two part and it import my video like this. We talk about these Import tools in the cut page lecture of Import tools. If you want to know about all these tools and how they work, then you have to go to the Cut page Import to lecture. Now, as you can see, we have multiple clips in timeline. You can also access to the source preview window if you click onto this icon, which is source clip. And as you can see, we have selected this clip. That is why it is showing this clip onto this preview Window. We have the video, we have the audio, and we have this tool as well. Now let's say I have my play head onto this position and I want to match this position in my timeline as well. So what I can do is I'm going to click onto this icon called Match frame. And if I click on it, as you can see, my playhead automatically move to this current position. If we select a different clip, let's say I'm going to select this one and I'm going to select Source. Let's double click to select this clip. So we have this clip in source clip preview window. So we have selected this area. I'm going to place my playhead onto this position. We click on the match frame, it will move this play head on the exact position of where we have this playhead. Let's place my playhead onto this position, and I'm going to double click select this clip, and I'm going to select this match frame, and it will match the frame of this playhead to this playhead. Now from here, we can also go to the source tape. You can select any clip that you want. In source tape, it combines all the clips in one single clip. Like we have the first clip, if I go to the second clip, I'm going to select the second clip, and as you can see, it move my playhead from this position to this position. And if you are noticing, we don't have the audio of this portion, the reason behind why we don't have the audio of this portion is because the video two and one don't have any audio. That is why we don't have the audio waveform of this clip. You can select this one, and as you can see, it shows the audio of this clip. You can also go to the timeline, and now we have these timeline clips on the preview window. If you remember, we trim this clip onto this preview window, I'm going to double click and I'm going to select this clip. And as you can see, we have in and out point of this clip. For example, I'm going to place my playhead onto this position, and you want to move this point to this position. So instead of manually moving this point to this position, you can click here. You can select Mark out, and it will place this marker, this trim point to this position where we have this playhead. You want to move the first point, you can place your playhead to a particular position, and then you can click onto this icon called Mark I. And now moves this trim start point to this position. So instead of marking mark in and Marko, we can use the shortcut key which is I for in and O for out. For example, I'm going to double click and I'm going to select my video. And as you can see, if I want my video to start from me, if I want to trim this part, I can simply press I on the keyboard. And as you can see, this is our end point. Now I'm going to set my out point, which is Markou by pressing the O on the keyboard, and as you can see, we have trimmed this clip. So the shortcut key is for mark in is I and for markou is O. Now, instead of manually resetting this point to their original position, we can do one more thing. Go to the mark, and as you can see, we have video clear in. If you select it, it will clear the point in and reset this point to its original position. If you select clear out, it will reset this mark out position to its original position. If you select the clear in and out, it will reset the both point to their original position. 21. Manage Timeline in Edit Page: Welcome back, everyone. Now let's talk about how to work in edit bit timeline. And this timeline is a little bit different than the previous timeline that we had in the cut pt. So if you are noticing in the timer, we have one instead of all zeros in timer. So I'm going to fix this problem. First of all, go to the DowntRsolve and go to the preferences. In preferences, you have to switch from system to user, and you have to go to the editing folder. Now in editing folder, this is the most important setting for timeline. By default, if you create a new timeline, these settings will applied to the new timeline by default. So I'm going to change my timer first to zero. Now if you notice we have one video track and we have one audio track. And the audio track is also set to the type stereotype. Now, if you want your new timeline to have multiple video tracks by default, by the way, we can also create multiple tracks in timeline afterward. But if you want by default, multiple video tracks or audio tracks, then you can type. For example, first of all, I'm going to save these settings. Now as you can see, we don't have the zero in timer, so I'm going to right click in the media pool, and I'm going to hover my mouse to timeline. I'm going to create a new timeline. And as you can see, by default, we have zero timer code for this timeline number two. I'm going to create this timeline, and as you can see, now we have by default, the 00 time code for this timeline. And in the preview window, if you notice we have timeline number two. You can also switch 2-1 timeline, and in one timeline, the first one, we have one in the time code. That is why it is so the one in time code. The mit dissolve, the benefit of Edit page is that you can create multiple timelines. So you can click, you can create another timeline. You can name your timeline, or you can just say timeline number three and save these settings. And as you can see, now we have three timelines. Now, how can we access these three timeline in the main timeline? So you have to click here onto this timeline view option, and you have to enable display tagged timelines. And now, as you can see, we have timeline number three. If you switch to timeline number one, now we have this timeline number one. If you switch to two, now we have this timeline number two. Now, for example, if you delete all the timeline, let's say you don't have any timeline anymore. You can simply go to the media pool and in Media Pool, as you can see, we have timeline number one, two, and three. And in the timeline, we also have this special icon which is assigned for timeline. You can double click onto this timeline, and now it is added right here. We set the timer to one, that is why in first timeline we have one timecode. If you go to the timeline number two, we have zero. If you go to the three, we have zero again. Now instead of going to the preferences and user and in new timeline, you don't have to change these settings. Instead, you can right click in the media pool, go to the timeline and select, create a new timeline. And in this timeline, you can decide whether you want to have maybe two video tracks or maybe three audio tracks, and you want to have empty timeline. Going to create and now check this out. We have 12 video track, and if I scroll down, we have one, two, and we have three audio tracks. You can, by the way, right click and you can delete empty tracks, and it will delete all the empty tracks instead of one video and one audio track. You can by the way, create a new timeline by clicking onto this plus icon. Right here, we don't have this timeline created is because you have to drag a clip onto this timeline, and now this timeline is set to timeline number five. If you want to create a new timeline again, then click onto this plus icon, drag and drop your clip onto this timeline, and now we have timeline number six. Now I'm going to close all my timelines. I'm going to disable Sag timeline. Now I'm going to drag my clip in this timeline, which is timeline number one. That is why we have this one in time code. I'm going to click here and I'm going to select Fixed playhead. And as you can see, like the edit page, now we have this fixed playhead like the Edit page. But I like my unfixed playhead because we can freely move in timeline like this. Now you can also increase the height of your video, and you can also increase the height of your audio. Now, by the way, you can increase or you can lower the height of your tracks by hovering your mouse onto the video, press Shift key, hold it, use the scroll of your mouse to zoom in and zoom out. Can also place your cursor on top of the audio, and again, you can press Shift key, use your scroll to zoom in and zoom out like this. Now, if you want to zoom in and zoom out this timeline, you can simply drag this slider to the right side to zoom in or to the left side to the minus part to zoom out your timeline. Can also select this detail Zoom, and it will all the way zoom in detail from where we have this playhead. So for example, I'm going to place my playhead onto this position and I'm going to select detail Zoom, and now it will detail Zoom to the position where we have this playhead. By the way, you can also select the old key, hold it, use the scroll to zoom in and zoom out your timeline like this. And as I'm doing this right now, while I'm doing this slider of the zoom in and Zoom out also moving. Now we also have this full extend Zoom, and it will full extend Zoom to all the videos that we have in timeline. So for example, I'm going to first of all zoom out by pressing the old key and use my scroll to zoom in and zoom out. We can drag these clips in timeline. By the way, we can select multiple clips like this, or you can select one clip, press the Control key, you can now select. Multiple clips like this, and now we can rack these clips again in timeline. Now if I select this extend Zoom, as you can see, it is fully extending the Zoom and it is fitting all the videos in this area. Let's say I want to select all these videos and I'm going to write leak copy, and I'm going to paste these videos right here. Like this empty space, which is called the ripple, we can press backspace to delete all these ripple. And now, for example, if I select Extend Zoom, as you can see, it fits all my clips that we have in timeline inside this portion. Now I'm going to select all my clips and I'm going to press backspace to delete all my clips, and now it is fully extending. So it is very useful. By the way, as you can see, in my video track, I have different images across all my video. Now you can also change this by going to the timeline view option and you can select thumbnail view. Right now, I have selected the film strip. You can select to the thumbnail, and it will show the first and the last frame thumbnail onto this track. You want to disable all the thumbnails, you can select none, and now we don't have any thumbnail onto this video track. Now for the videos, it is very useful if you select your thumbnail view to film strip. We can also change the audio as well so we can display the full waveform of this audio and check this out. We have the full waveform. We can change the waveform to border, and now it will show us this line which is the border. Line shows on the part of the audio where we don't have any audio. If I zoom in, I'm going to press Alt key, so I'm going to select the free Zoom. Now we can drag this slider and now check this out. If I zoom in, we don't have this line where we have the audio. We only have this line appears on the empty space. So now I'm going to disable my waveform, and I'm going to also disable my full waveform. We also have a new updates. We have a new option which is called the viewer background. So for example, I'm going to select my clip and I'm going to zoom out. And as you can see, in the background, we have a complete black screen. If you visibly want to view the empty background behind your video, you can simply go to the timeline option. You can go to the viewer background. You can select the checkerboard, and now we have the checkerboard behind this video. Now we can also switch the Weaver to gray or if you really want to catch the empty background, you can set this to red. I'm going to set my background to checkerboard. Now let's reset this transform. 22. Proxies | Fast Way to Preview Clip: Yes. Welcome back, everyone. Now let's talk about the biggest problem. While you edit your video, you might face this problem. I'm going to drag my clip in timeline, and sometimes it struggle to preview your clip smoothly. So we have two options right here. Either we can go to the playback, we can go to the timeline, playback resolution, and right now it is set to full. If you change this to half, the quality will also reduce. If you zoom in as you can see, if I lower my quality again to quarter, as you can see, now we have this low resolution. But you will get a smooth preview without any lag. Now I'm going to set my timeline playback resolution to full, and now this is the original resolution. Now, if you notice right here above this preview window, we have these three options. First, we have disable all proxies. Then we have preferred proxies. Then we have preferred camera originals. First, let's talk about the preferred camera originals. So if you check this one, it will preview your clip at your original resolution. You enable the proxy, it will play your video according to the proxy media. If you disable all the proxy, it will disable all the proxies. Now, what is the proxy? First of all, I'm going to click here on the settings, project settings, go to the master settings. If you scroll down, you can see we have this optimized media and render cache. Right now my proxy media resolution is set to quarter. You can select your resolution as well. If you want to select the half original, you want 18, or you want 116, or you can choose automatically. And it will automatically generate a Pxymdia resolution for you. But for this video, I'm going to select half. I'm going to change my Pxymdia format to ProRes 422 HQ, and we can also change the optimized media format and render cache format to ProRes 422 HQ as well. Now in the working folder, if you scroll down a little bit, you can find that we can choose the location to export the proxy media. So after you change your settings, you can click on this save button. Now we can go to the media pool. We can right click. By the way, if you want to do this step in the media page, you can also do that right here. And right click on your clip that you want to generate a proxy media for, go to the Pxymdia and you can click on this generate Proxy media. But I'm going to do this in Edit folder. So right click on any clip that you want to generate Proxy media for, go to the Pxymdia and generate Proxy media. And as you can see, it is now generating Pxymedia for this file as well. Right here, the clip does not change because we disable all the proxy. So I'm going to prefer proxy. And as you can see, as I change my media to proxy, it also lower my resolution because we set the half resolution in the proxy media. If you set your preferred camera originals, and as you can see now, we have this full HD view. Now I'm going to set my media to prefer proxy, and as you can see, now we have the smooth preview. We can also loop this, so now it will play in a loop. Now let's go to the location where we generate this proxy media. So now let's go to the settings, and as you can see proxy media location, which is set to user phase proxy generation location, which is this one. Now, this is the location for my proxy media, so I'm going to copy my location, and now I'm going to paste my location right here. Press Enter, go to the user, go to the phase. Now I am here in my proxy media location where I export my proxy media. And as you can see, if I play my clip, this is the proxy media clip. This is a low resolution clip. This way, we can use the proxies, and we can play a small preview while editing the videos. 23. Link and Unlink Clips: Welcome back, everyone. Now we will talk about the most important part, again, in video editing, which is called Link clips. Now, currently, this clip is linked to its audio. If you want to unlink, if you want to remove the audio separately, you can do this called Unlink. You can unlink. And as you can see, guys, we can separately move this audio. But if you notice we have this icon like we have right here, which is called the Link This clip is linked to this audio right now. You click here Link Selection, as you can see, if I select my click, we can move these two together. But if you want to unlink the audio of this video, you can right click and you can uncheck Link clips. And as you can see, it will remove the icon like we have right here, which is Link Selection icon. Now we can select the video. We can move the video separately, and we don't have that annoying timing that we had before. So let me show you what the timing I'm talking about. I'm going to select the audio plus the video, right click Links the clip. If I uncheck the link selection, if I move my audio, we have this timing, which is also very useful if you accidentally move your audio of your clip or maybe move your clip to a different position than your audio. But if you want to unlink your clip, you can select the clip that you want to unlink and you can uncheck link clips. And as you can see, we can move these together because we have selected these two. If I click here, unselect everything, and now if I click Select the audio, we can move the audio separately. Not only you can link clip audio or unlink Clips audio, you can also links two clips together. For example, I'm going to select my audio, Rs delete key or backspace. I'm going to drag my clip in timeline. I'm going to also delete this audio. So I'm going to press Backspace. It will delete my audio because we have unchecked the link selection. Now I'm going to select these two clip, right click Link clips. And as you can see, if I select one clip, we can move this clip, but we have the timer that indicate that these two clips are connected. These two clips are linked to each other. So now we can enable the link selection. And now if I click here to this empty space, I'm going to select my clip, and as you can see, it is now selecting the both clips. So these two clips are linked together. 24. Timeline Tracks in Edit Page: Hey. Welcome back, everyone. So now let's talk about how timeline tracks work in Edit page. Like the cut page, we have some similarities like we can disable the video tracks, and you can't really preview the videos of this track. We can also log the video track and you can't really move the video track. Instead, if you have an audio of this video, you can move that audio, but you can't really move the video. If you want to log the audio as well, you can simply click onto this icon, and now we can move the video only. We can't really move this audio track. We have a position log feature that enable us to log all the tracks position, no matter it is audio or video track, we can enable this by clicking onto this log icon position log. And as you can see, if I select my video track plus the audio, we can't really move any of the video and audio track. We can unlock this, and now we can move the video and the audio track as well. If you notice if I attach my clip, we have this magnetic field which is called the snapping and we even have a line appear on top of and between these clips, this is called snapping. It does snap two clips together like this. If you want to disable this snapping, you can simply click onto this magnetic icon, which is called the snapping. And by the way, the shortcut key is N. Now, if you want to know the shortcut key of any of these tool, you can simply hover your mouse onto that tool. And as you can see, we have this message appear snapping and we have this N. It indicates that the snapping shortcut key is N. Now, if I disable this as you can see, we don't have that magnet. If I enable the snapping, now we can just snap clips together like this. It is very useful. Now if I place my playhead between two clips, as you can see, it also snap, it also magnetically connect like this. But if I disable the snapping, now we don't have that snapping effect anymore. I'm going to enable this. We have another tool called Link Selection, and the shortcut key is Control Shift plus L. Now, how does this tool work? So if I select my video, as you can see, the audio is also selected with my video. So if you want to only select the audio or the video, you can simply disable this call ink selection, and now we can freely select individually the audio or the video, and we can move them individually as well. Now, if you move your video or audio separate position, as you can see, we have this time, we have minus 44 and we have plus 44. It is indicating that we are moving this track video and audio position separately. So we can simply connect these two together like this. Now we can enable the link selection tool, and now we can select the audio plus the video, and we can move them together like this. If you want to create multiple video tracks, if you want to stack all the videos on top of each, as you can see, as I'm doing this, a new video track is created. I'm going to place my video like this. I'm going to press Shift, hold, and use my scroll to zoom out so we can clearly see the tracks. And now, as you can see, I'm going to drag this line. By the way, you can drag this line to move your track upward or downward like this. Now we have four video tracks and we have three audio tracks. If I select my videos, I'm going to press Backspace. I'm going to select this video, I'm going to press backspace. Now we only have one video, but we have multiple audio and video tracks. So we can do one more thing. Right click onto these tracks. We can delete empty tracks, and it will delete all the empty tracks. You right click, you can add a track. If you write click, you can add tracks. So for example, I'm going to select Track, and now it is asking me which kind of video or audio track I want. So I want my mono audio track. Now, let's create track. And as you can see, it is now creating both tracks, Video plus audio. You right click, you can also delete the empty tracks. Again. If you right click onto a created track, we also have this color change. So I'm going to first of all, change the height of these videos, and now I'm going to add my clip to a separate track like this. Now, for example, if you want to change the color of your second track, you can simply right click onto this track. You can go to the color change, and you can select maybe a different color like orange and now check this out. We set this color, this video track color to orange. If I drag and drop any video onto this track, that video color will be the orange. And if I create another track, let's suppose we created a third track, so I'm going to drag this timeline right here and I'm going to place my video on top of this track. So we have track number three. So now I'm going to right click onto this track number three, and I'm going to change the color to olive. Now check this out. We have blue orange and we have olive. Way you can clearly differentiate between your clips. Now I'm going to select all my clips instead of this one, press backspace, R click empty Tracks. Now, currently, we only have one clip in the timeline. I'm going to drag my second clip in timeline, and I'm going to place this clip right here. We have this empty space this is called Ripple and it is also available for the audio. If you select this ripple and you press backspace, it will delete this ripple. If you select your video and you press backspace, it will delete your video. But if I press ControZ to undo my action, if I select my clip and press Delete key, will also delete the ripple plus video plus the empty space that is behind this playhead. So for example, let's press Konto Z to undo my action. I'm going to place my third clip after my second clip. Let's say you want to delete this clip completely, and you want this video to attach to this video. So this case, what you can do is you can select your video, press Delete key, and it is now automatically attached to the Fs clip. If you want this video to completely removed, you can press Delete key, and it will also remove the empty space of that video as well. I'm going to place my video like this and I'm going to place this video on top of this video like this. Now my high recommendation is if you select clip, don't press delete key because it will also change the position of your upper track as well. So for example, if you have a different track, we have third track and you delete this video, press delete key, I will delete this video plus. I will also change the position of your other video tracks or elements as well. Now I'm going to press Controz to undo my action. Not only it is moving the position of the third rack, but it is also trimming the portion that it's covered above the first track. So for example, the first track end to this position, and this track have some portion of this video outside this line. So if I select my clip, press delete key, as you can see, it also trim my first part of this video. I'm going to press Control Z. So as you can see, it deleted this part from my video. So how can we avoid this problem? How can we avoid this mess? Can simply select your clip, press backspace. Instead of the delete key, you can press backspace. This way, it will only delete the clip, but it won't move any position of the above track. Now you can simply select your tracks and you can move their position like this. If you want to delete this track, you can delete this track, and as you can see, it is also deleted the portion of my check in track video as well. So I'm going to press Contosi to avoid this problem. All you need to do, first, I'm going to delete the empty tracks. This way, we can better understand. So the only way to avoid the positioning changing problem is to select your crypt, and instead of pressing the delete key, you can press backspace. And now you can change the position of this whole video. If the delete key is causing all this trouble, why we have the delete key? Now the delete key is very useful. If you have your audio or video in one track and you don't want to manually move their position, you can simply select any video track, press delete key, and it will delete the video plus the empty space as well. But if you have multiple tracks, then I highly recommend don't press delete key. Just select your clip, press backspace. This way, you won't face any position changing problem. So this is how the tracks work in the additive page of the int resolve. 25. Trim and Cut in Edit Page: Welcome back, everyone. Now we will talk about the different ways to cut and merge your clips in the Vint dissolve edit page. First of all, I'm going to import this podcast gas clip in the timeline, and first, we have this mode called selection mode. It is used to select your clip or you can select anything in the timeline. Now, in the next mode, we have this trim edit mode. You can also access this mode by pressing the T on the keyboard. And as you can see, as I press the we can access this mode. You press A, which is set to this selection mode, we can access to this selection mode tool. Now I'm going to press T, and if I trim my clip, for example, let's trim the part. As you can see, we can select which part of the video we want to keep in this selected selection. So this tool is used to move your clip like this. You can also trim the starting point as well like this. And we can also choose which part of the clip you want to keep in this section. I'm going to press Control Z to undo all these actions. Next mode is called the blade mode, and we can select this blade edit mode by pressing the B, shortcut key to access this blade edit mode. We can add cuts, as you can see, while I select this mode, we have this razor icon appear on top of my cursor. We can add as many cuts as we want. We can split this clip in multiple parts like this. Now, for example, if you ddt these many cards and you want to undo this, you can either press Control Z to undo your action, but we have another options, which is an efficient way to do this. We can join these clips again. So how can we join this clip again? Well, we have to go to the timeline. As you can see, guys, in timeline, we have this option called joint clips. If we select these joint clips, I'm going to first of all, select all my clips, go to the timeline, and now join clips. And as you can see, the clips are now joined into one single clip. But you have to keep this in mind. If you change their position, for example, if I add a cut, I'm going to add another cut. I'm going to select this selection mode. I'm going to change the position of this clip right here and I'm going to also select these two clips and I'm going to place them right here beside each other, but we change their original position. Now, this time, if you select all these clips, go to the timeline, select join clips. You can't really join the clips because we change their original position. So in order to join a clip, you have to place their original position. And now if I select my clip, go to the timeline, join clips. Boom, we join these clips. Next one is called the dynamic tree mode. And if I select this as I select this mode, the playhead is turned perfect. If you high clip as you can see it is now playing in lieu of a particular section. So now I'm going to place my playhead to this position. Now I set my playhead right here for second. And if I play my clip, if you're noticing, we are going back to seconds Faizan Amj me with it. And if I stop my video by pressing the space key, it goes back to its original position. Now, if I unselect this by clicking on it again, we have this red playhead, which is the original playhead. If I play my and if I press once again, as you can see, it stop at the last position where it was at. Now if we select the dynamic tree mode, it go back to the starting point. If we change the position, it goes back to 2 seconds off the original position that we place with a professional video editor Faizan Amjed. This way, you can preview a particular section over and over again. I'm going to disable this. Now we have the most important tool to trim your clip or to split your clip is called the Razer mode. To access this mode, we have to go to the timeline. And we have this razor tool. The shortcut key is Control B. If I select this one, as you can see, we added a cut. Now this time I'm going to use my keyboard shortcut, which is the Control B. I'm going to add a cut right here, so Control B. If you want to add a cut right here, we can press Control B. Now, instead of adding a cut right here and remove this silent by pressing the delete key and selecting this clip, we can do one more thing. So this time, I'm going to add a cut right here. Now we are going to remove this silent part of my video without spending any time by using the playhead and by using the shortcut key. So go to the trim and go to the ripple. And as you can see, we have start to play head, and we have to play head. Now, by default, you won't have these shortcut keys. So to set these shortcut keys, you have to go to the Daventry resolve. You have to go to the keyboard customization. Now I'm going to search playhead. If you scroll down, we have this ripple. You can go to the ripple folder and you can click here and you can assign any keyboard shortcut that you want to assign to this tool. Now I set the keyboard shortcuts to Q and E. So as you can see, we have start to play head Q, and we have end to play head E. Now, if I press Q, which is before this part, delete all the section that comes before this playhead and if I go to the end part, for example, I'm going to use old key scroll to zoom in and zoom out my timeline, I'm going to add a cut right here by pressing the Control B, and now I'm going to delete this section. So we can use the Q, or if you want to remove this section, we can press Control Z again, or you can click here as you can see, between these two clips, we have this green line. We can press backspace. So it will rejoin this clip. It will join these clips together. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to add a cut right here and I'm going to place my playhead right here. This time, I'm going to press E on the keyboard, and this time it will remove all the section that comes after this playhead. So I'm going to press E and boom. I remove all the parts that comes after this playhead. It will only delete the part, that is the part of this clip, not the next clip. So for example, if I want to delete this section of this clip, I'm going to click Air Foster off, or you can select your clip. Now I'm going to press E, and as you can see, it is now only deleting only this video part, not the whole timeline. I'm going to click here to unselect everything. I'm going to place my playhead right here, press Q, and it will delete all the section of this video that is coming before this playhead. So Presque and boom, it deletes the starting part of this clip. So these are the tools that are used to cut and jon your clips in Edit page. 26. Editing Timelapse in Edit Page: Welcome back, everyone. Now I'm going to show you how we can edit time laps easily inside vent to solve. First of all, I have this folder where I have sequence of images. This is the time laps. The first thing that you need to do is you have to make a sequence of your time laps. If your images is not in a sequence, then you have to create a sequence. So for example, if you don't have a sequence of images, what you can do, you can press Control A through select all your images. Now the second step, you have to press Control C to copy all your images. You have to create a new folder and you have to paste your images in a new folder. Now, once you paste your images or time labs in a new folder, you can refresh your folder. You can select the first image, press Control A, right click on the first image, and you can rename this to maybe one. Now if you press Inter as you can see, guys, now we have these images in a sequence. Have one and inside this bracket, we have one. And if we look at the last image, we have one, and inside bracket, we have 160. Now I'm going to press Control A, I'm going to import these time labs, and I'm going to drop this in media pool. So this is how you normally import your images or videos in Media Pool. But if you are doing the time labs and you are importing your time labs like this, then you are doing the wrong thing. First, I'm going to press Control A to select all my images. I'm going to import these in timeline. Now if we play this timelapse, as you can see, guys, the timelapse is taking too long. Now we have second image, right here, we have third image, and we have fourth image, et cetera. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to select a one image press Control A, I'm going to delete all these images. The right way to import your timelapse is to go to the folder and drag and drop directly to this timeline. And now if I play this timelapse, as you can see, guys, now the timelapse is running smoothly. We can set this to loop and now we can play and we can preview this timelapse. Now you can do whatever you want. You can zoom in, zoom out, position, et cetera. You can do everything that you want to do to this time labs. If you want to add cut, you can also do that. This is basically a clip. We can add anything onto this clip that we want. 27. Flags and Markers: Welcome back, everyone. Now, let's talk about the flag and marker. Now in my timeline, as you can see, we have these two, we have flag, and we have marker. So what are the purpose of these two? So we use the marker if we are explaining something. So for example, if I want to highlight, like for example, in this frame, I'm highlighting that we are standing in this frame. We can add a marker to this position. By the way, we can click A and we can select the color of the marker. Going to select the yellow color. Now if you select the yellow color or any color, once you add a marker, you can click here and you can go to the annotations. Once you go to the annotations, we have control on the preview window. We can zoom in, zoom out. We can press the scroll and we can rack this window like this. Now, for example, I'm going to draw or we can use the shapes. I'm going to draw these people like this. Now I'm going to also draw this person as well. And if you want to add some marker, let's say to this position, where we have these two people again, we can maybe add a marker like this. We can explain something to the viewer or if we are doing a presentation, we can also add an arrow. If you want to add an arrow, we can also change brush, stroke, size, and we can draw like this or we can maybe add a line like this. We can also change the color to yellow or to blue or to any color that you want. Now, this is the marker. Now to remove the marker, we can simply right click and we can remove all the marker. Or if you want to only remove this marker, you can select this marker, press delete key, it will delete only the selected marker. Now I'm going to select this marker, press delete key, and we delete all the markers. Now on the other hand, the flag is a different thing. So currently we only have one clip in the timeline. So now I'm going to drag and drop a second clip. I'm going to press Alt key so we can better understand. Now I'm going to select my second clip. I'm going to select the color of my flag to green, and as you can see, it added this flag. If I select this flag, we can double click onto this flag, and right, as you can see, we can write a note. So for example, I'm going to write maybe like a hand picking a car. Can also change the color afterward if you want to, I'm going to set my color to maybe red and we can press done. And as you can see, guys, if I double click, we can preview the nodes that we write onto this flag. We can also remove the flag if we want to. Now, by the way, if you split your clip in multiple parts, so for example, let's add a cut right here. I'm going to add a cut right here or maybe add a cut right here. If you select one single part of this clip, we split this clip in four parts. So basically, we have four different videos. If you select one part of the same clip and if you add a marker, and as you can see, it added the flags to all these clips because these clips are a part of a one single clip. You double click, you maybe write something, you write a note, you change the color, click on the done, as you can see, it also make these changes to all the clips because these clips are a part of one single clip. On the other hand, if you select this clip, you add a marker. As you can see, it adds a marker only to this clip, not the whole timeline clips. So to understand these two in one sentence, if you want to explain someone on the preview indo, you can use the marker. If you want to add a note onto a clip, then you can use the flag. 28. Crop and Transform Clips: Welcome back everyone. Now we will talk about the transform and crop of the clip inspector. So if you select your clip, and if you go to the inspector, as you can see, right here, we have transform and right here we have crop. First of all, let's talk about the transform. So in transform, you can basically zoom in and zoom out your clip, change the position of your clip. You can rotate your clip. You can change the anchor point, or you can pit and you can change. You can also flip your clip. You can also flip your clip in horizontally. Now I'm going to reset all the transform controls that we have here. I'm going to click here on the preview Window and I'm going to select transform, and it basically give us the control so we can change the transform onto this preview window. So if I zoom out and zoom in, as you can see, these values are also changing. If I change the position, the position values are now changing. If I rotate my clip like this, the rotation angle is also changing. Now, what is the anchor point? Going to reset my transform. So the anchor point is right here in the center by default. If I zoom out and zoom in, as you can see, guys, the clip is zoom in and zoom out from the center. If we change the position of this anchor point right here, and if I zoom in and zoom out, as you can see, guys, it is now zooming in and zooming out according to this point. Let's reset these controls again. Now this time, I'm going to set my anchor point to this position. And if I rotate my clip, as you can see, guys, my clip is now rotating from this position. If I change the position, it will rotate from that position because we set the anchor point to a different point. I'm going to reset my transform control, and next, we have pitch. If you increase the pitch, we got some result like this. If you change the slider of the pitch, if you change yo, you will get the result, something like this. Or you can play around with the slider to get a funny result like this. Now we have this big head video effect. And if I play my clip, let's disable Transform Control, check out. We have this funny effect. So you can play around with these sliders. Next, we have the flip. We can basically flip the clip in vertical or in horizontal. Now let's move on to cropping. We can also access the cropping effect from the preview window, we can click here and we can select the crop. And now we can crop this video like this. Or you can click here and you can manually use this slider to crop your video. Can also soften the edges. So for example, let's scrob the video like this, and now I'm going to soften the eddies like this. You can also exclude or include the edges like this. We also have a feature called retain image position. So for example, if I change my position, as you can see, the position is changing like this. But if I check the retain image position, as you can see, guys, the cropping window is locked, and now we can change the position inside this cropping window. We can also zoom in and zoom out inside this window that we have selected. So as you can see, these values are not changing. These values are basically locked by the retain image position. If we uncheck this, as you can see, we can zoom in and zoom out, and it will also fill the screen. But if we, for example, check the retain image position, now check this out. It is now locked. In. So I'm going to show you a use case to use the transform and cropping together. So I'm going to reset these two. And I have this example. This is the podcast. I am a host and I'm also a guest. So now I'm going to place my clip like this. And from this position, I'm going to Control B to split my clip. I'm going to select my guest, and I'm going to flip the guest. I'm going to change the position of the guest like this. I'm going to also crop this, I'm going to enable the crop. We can crop this. We can select this video. Go to the transform. I'm going to change the position like this. I'm going to select my video, and I'm going to crop this. Like this. Let's change the position. So I'm going to press Control Z and now check this out. We can also soften the edges like this. We can select this video, we can change the position. We can also lower the transform zoom out a little bit. I'm going to right click and I'm going to copy this value. I'm going to select my second clip and I'm going to also paste this value. So we will have the same Zoom out effect. We can also select multiple clips and we can also change their zoom out or their transform or cropping values together like this. Now I'm going to select my first clip and I'm going to change its position, select the host. I'm going to also change its position like this. And now check this out. If I disable the transform, first we have this clip, and then we have this video. 29. Keyframe Animation: Welcome back, everyone. Now let's do some keyframe animations in Edit page. So if you select your clip, and as you can see in inspector, we have these diamond shapes. These diamond shapes represent key frames. Now, whatever the position or inspector have these diamond shapes, you can animate those values or those effect. You want to have a zoom in from the first second to the fifth second of this video, first, we have to add a keyframe in the starting point of the video, and in the fifth second, we can just add a zoom in. So we can click here and we can drag this slider, these values to the right side to increase the value of the zoom or we can lower these value by dragging them to the left side. So this is how these values work. We can also click here once and we can type the customized value. So I'm going to type 1.3, press Enter. And now if we go to the keyframe, as you can see, we have these keyframes. Now, for some reason, if you don't want to have a zoom in to this position, you can also change the keyframes position as well. So for example, if you change your mind that you want to have a zoom in from this position. Don't have to just reset and add keyframe all over again. You can just select these keyframes and you can drag these keyframes right here. So I'm going to select this keyframe. So first of all, press Control Z, and now I'm going to select these keyframes. Let's drag this keyframe to this position, and now check this out. We don't have any zoom in effect, but if we enter from 0.1 to 0.2, check this out. We have a zoom in effect. Now, if you want to have a Zoom out effect, but you don't want to have a zoom out or zoom in effect between this area, we can add a keyframe. We did not define anything between these keyframes, so it will stay static. So if I play my clip, as you can see, we have a zoom in and in between these keyframes, we don't have anything because we did not define anything. Now I'm going to place my playhead right here and I'm going to have a Zoom out, so I'm going to double click, press one on the keyboard and press Enter and now check this out. We have static area, and now we have a Zoom out effect. Now you can also animate these values like position. So let's go to the first frame. By the way, you can also click here on the arrow and you can go to the next frame or you can go to the previous frame like this. So I'm going to select my first frame. I'm going to add a keyframe in position, go to the next frame right here and I'm going to change my position like this. Now let's go to the next keyframe and again, go to the next keyframe. I'm going to double click and I'm going to type zero, which is the normal value for position Y, and for position X, we have a zero value again. Now if we play the clip, as you can see, guys, my head will stay in the center because we animate the Zoom and position values. Between the point, it is also changing the position of the videos because we did not add a keyframe to this point and to this point to make the position static between these points. So if you want to have your position static, you can add a keyframe and you don't have to define anything between your keyframe, so it won't change the position. Now, again, we can go to the keyframe graph, and as you can see, guys, we have these keyframes. We can press Control A to select all these keyframes and we can select Es in. Now, by the way, as you can see, guys, we have Zoom X, Zoom Y, position X, and position Y. If you add a keyframe, for example, in the rotation, I'm going to add a keyframe in rotation, and if I scroll down as you can see, guys, we have now rotation angle added to this keyframe. If we go to the next keyframe position, if I rotate my video, as you can see guys, we are adding this keyframe animation. It is also updating this keyframe right here. We have this orange line that represent the rotation angle. If you hover your mouse onto a keyframe graph line, it will also shows you the label. This is the rotation angle. This is the position Y, this is position X, and if we hover the mouth, this is the softness. I'm going to also, Zoom in, we have now a separate keyframe animation window. You can select the value. For example, if you want to select the position X and you don't know where is the position X, you can select the position X, and it will highlight that position in this keyframe graph. So now I'm going to select position Y and check this out, we have position Y. I'm going to select my rotation and check this out. We have this rotation. Now, if you want to close this window, you can simply click on this close button. It will reset the position of this keyframe animation window to right here, which is by default, the position of this keyframe window. So this is how we can add keyframe animations in edit page. 30. Adding Dynamic Zoom: Welcome back, everyone. So if you want to add a Zoom in and Zoom out effect on your video, but you don't want to spend much time on key frame animation, we have another option called Dynamic Zoom. First of all, I'm going to shrink my media pool. So we have this big timeline. Let's track this timeline right here. Now I'm going to enable my dynamic zoom, and dynamic Zoom will apply to this whole video. Now, if I play my clip, as you can see, guys, nothing is changing, nothing is happening. The reason behind why nothing is happening is because this video is too long and zoom out value is too short. Now the dynamic Zoom will apply to the whole clip, not a single portion of your clip. So if you want to have a fast zoom in maybe from this point to maybe this point, then you have to split your clip. So I'm going to press Control B to split my clip, select my second clip, and I'm going to resb Dynamic Zoom. Now if we play the clip, as you can see, guys, now we have a fast Zoom out. Now you can also swap the Dynamic Zoom effect, so you have to foster select your clip. You can swap the value of Dynamic Zoom. And now, as you can see, instead of Zoom out, it will zoom in. You can also click here and you can select Dynamic Zoom. This window, the green window represent the original position of your video, and the red window represent the Zoom value of your video. So for example, if I play my clip, check this out. We have a zoom in. If you want to have a much zoom in, then you have to select the red window and you have to lower the size of this window. And for example, if you want to have a zoom in to this phase, I'm going to play my clip and check this out. We have a fat Zoom and we have zoom in all the way to the pace. We have dynamic Zoom es value, so we can select the linear. We can select the Es in. It will smooth out the animation. It will start slow and then it will fast zoom in. If we select the Es out, it will start fast and it will slowly zoom in. If we select the Es in and Es out, you have a roller costeride we have fast and we have slow, and we have fast again. Now we can also swap the values, and as you can see, it will now zoom out from this tiny position. So now it will start from my face. So I'm going to disable this dynamic zoom. As you can see, it is now starting to zoom out from my position of the face. If you want to have another zoom in from this position, you can also split your clip again and I'm going to split right here, select my clip. I'm going to add a zoom in. And I'll check this out. So we have to swap the values. Now we have zoom in. If you want to have a smooth zoom in and zoom out, you can split your clip again, select the second clip and add a dynamic zoom. I'm going to select this clip and I'm going to set the values of the ease to ease in, select this to ease out. So we have slow and we have fast. So now we have slow zoom in and we have fast zoom out. Te this out. So this way, you can add your zoom in and zoom out animations without spending any time on keyframe animation. But 31. Transform Effect in Edit Page: Welcome back everyone. Now, if you go to the effts and you select the open effects folder and you search for transform, we have transform effect like we have in the inspector transform. So why we have to transform? If we have a transform in inspector, so then why we have this inspector? Well, to explain this, I have these two clips in timeline first, I am asking the question, so I am the podcast host and I'm also the guest of this podcast. So I arrange these clips like I'm asking the question, and then I'm asking the question. Now as you can see eye, the first video is overlapping the second clip, so we can't really see the second clip. So I'm going to add a simple keyframe animation, select the first clip, I'm going to add a keyframe animations of Zoom and position. Go to the next frame, maybe one seconds of this clip where I am answering the question, and I'm going to double click Type 0.6, select this clip, and I'm going to type 0.6, press intern. Now I'm going to also change my position X. Right here. Select this clip, and I'm going to also flip this clip and change the position. By the way, we did not add any keyframe animations to this clip. So if we play the clip, how are you doing, man? I'm fine. As you can see, guys, we have this simple animation. Now I'm going to select my clip postcard host. I'm going to press old key, hold it, and I'm going to drag this clip to the right side. So we duplicate this clip. Or you can drag this to the upside like this. Now I can select this clip, press Backspace to delete the clip. Now I'm going to select this clip and I'm going to reset the inspector transform. We can disable this track for now. I'm going to select my transform effect and drop this effect on top of this clip. Now from this position, let's view the graph, select the graph. So we added a keyframe to this position, go to the effects, and as you can see in effects, we have the same controls that we had in inspector transform. Have position X Y, Zoom rotation width, pitch EO, flip horizontal et cetera. So now I'm going to add a keyframe in position X, and I'm going to add a keyframe in Zoom value as well. So from this point, select the second clip through this point, as you can see this is the final point where we added a keyframe animation. I'm going to select my first clip, go to the effxs double click 50.6, and I'm going to change my position like So this position X Y is different than this position. So if you notice in the original, we have minus 631, but in the effect transform in position X -0.311. Now, as you can see, we have the same zoom out effect. So what is the difference between this transform and inspector transform? If I disable this, if I enable this track, as you can see, we have the same zoom out effect. So what is different? What is the benefit of having the effect transform? Going to disable this track, and I'm going to enable my first track where we have effect transform. Now I'm going to select my clip, scroll down a little bit, go to the animations, and right here, we have motion blur. If you enable the motion blur, as you can see, guys, we're adding this motion blur. If I play my are you doing, man? Check out we have this motion blur. We can apply the motion blur onto eclipe. We can select the motion blur values. If you want to have extreme motion blur, the extreme value is up to one and the lowest value is zero, which means no motion blur. I'm going to have a little bit motion blur and check this out. I'm fine. How are you doing, man. So this is transform effect motion blur. And without the motion blur, this is transfer. I'm fine. T. Now I'm going to disable this track and enable this effect transform track. Now, in effect transform track, if you go to the video, we also have the video inspector transform as well. So this define the original position of your clip. So for example, I'm going to disable my transform effect. You can also enable and disable your effect by toggle this button. Go to the video. And I'm going to lower my Zoom to 0.8. Now, this is the original position because we change the position in inspected transform, not the effect transform. And if we enable the effect transform, now it will zoom out from this position. Now, check this out. Thanks. Now we have this zoom out because we define the original position in the transform. We can also define the position like this, and as you can see, it is cropping from this point. So why it is cropping the video is because it is exiting the main window. So if I select my transform, if I change the position like this, as you can see, this part of my video is outside this preview window. So now if I enable transform, it will crop like this. So if we select the position X, as you can see, it cropped out this part because in the inspector transform, we exiting this window. So this is the original position of your clip, and this is the effects value of your clip. Now I'm going to select these keyframes and I'm going to press delete key to delete these keyframes. Not only the motion bar, if you scroll down, if you go to the image adjustment, as you can see, we also have the edge softness and we also have this edge rounding. So you can have this circle profile effect. If I play my clip check this out. We have this circle profile. You scroll down a little bit in advanced options, we have this edge behavior called transparent. So it means the outside the circle window, we have transform background. But if you select the reflect, as you can see, guys, it is reflecting this video outside this empty space. So if we go to the image adjustment, if we reset the edge rounding, check this out. We have this video filling the gap of this empty background. We can also change the behavior to wrap around or to replicate. And this is basically the composite mode. And this is opacity in transform. Teck this out, this is opacity. So this is the transform original position of the inspector. And if we go to the effect, if we increase the blend mode, track this out. This is the effect position, and this is the inspector transform position. Now we have also some advanced controls in this effect transform. If I reset my clip, go to the video inspector, also reset my video inspector. Now if we go to the effect, if we click here, we have this interactive Canvas. Now if you select this, we also have to go to the Open effects overlay. We have to enable this open effects overlay. Now we can control the transform onto preview Window. But we can't really animate these transform controls because we don't have any key frame values. We can also select the interactive pins and check this out. We can add a pin right here and we can move the image. We can also add a pin right here. Now we can change the transform zoom in and zoom out from this point. We can add a point right here and check this out. Now I can reset my point. I'm going to add two points, so go to the interactive pin, reset my transform. Now go to the interactive pin. I'm going to add a pin right here and pin right here. And if I add a pin right here, check this out. Now we have this interesting effect. So this way, you can move your window. You can have some interesting effect onto your videos like this. So let's reset click here, go to the interactive pin. Let's add this pin like this and now check this out. If I disable my open effects, check them out, we place this window in this position. So this is the difference between the transform effect and inspector transform. 32. Composite Mode in Edit Page: Welcome back, everyone. Now, if you select your clip and you go to the inspector, right now, we have this composite mode. So what this is? Well, this mode is defined whether you want to effect the white or if you want to effect the blacks in your video. So I'm going to drag this image, which I generated using hat GBT. And this image we have this palette. We have different level of white and different level of black. Now this define whether if you want to effect the white of this image or if you want to effect the black of this image. In this mode, currently, we set this mode to normal, which is by default, the normal mode. If you select the above image, we can only change the opacity of this mode right now. If you click, we have this drop down menu. Now, if you hover your mouse onto a mode, as you can see, it will affect your image in different ways. Now in this composite mode, we have so many mode. So what all these mode is all about. First, I'm going to define the darkened mode. So in the darkened mode, we have, first of all, the darken. It will effect only the dark area. As you can see, it take away the white area, the white level, and it is only affecting the dark part of this image. In the darkened mode, we have next, which is multiply. The white is less effective by this mode, and the black is more effecting by this mode. Next, we have the color bun. As you can see, it is affecting the dark level of this above image. Next we have another bun, which is called the linear bun, and it is also affecting the dark part of my image. Next, we have the darkened color. As you can see, it takes away the white level, and it is only affecting the black level of this image. So this mode affecting the black area of your image. Now let's talk about the lighten mode, which is opposite of this darkened mode. First of all, we have the lighten. If you scroll down, you have this lighting. As you can see, it take away the black area, and it is only affecting the white level of this image, which is above the current image. Next, we have the screen. As you can see, if you select the screen, it is more affecting the white than the black. Next, we have the lighter color. This one. And next, we have two, which is the linear doge, which is this one. And if you scroll up, we have this color doge. Now in the next category, we have the contrast, which only effect the white and black. So let me show you what I mean. I'm going to first of all set my mode. Normal This is my normal mode. Now I'm going to change my mode to overlay, the middle level is like a transparent. So these contras mode will only affect the white and the black level of your image, and it won't affect the middle level. In the contrast mode category, we have four more modes. We have this vivid light. If you scroll up, we have the spin light, and we have this linear light. And if you scroll up a bit, we have this hard light. The next category, which is inversion. Now, in inversion category, we have extreme mode like if you scroll down, we have this exclusion. We have hard mix, we have difference, and if you scroll down even more, subtract. So these were the inversion modes category, and they aren't very useful. In the final category, we have the color component. As you can see, guys, if you scroll down, we have this saturation. It will effect the saturation of your image. So I'm going to delete this chart for now, and I'm going to bring my podcast. I'm going to take this image above this track. Now I'm going to select my image, which is this one, and now I'm going to sect the mode to saturation. And as you can see, guys, it is affecting the saturation of this image. It blends the saturation of this image onto this video. We have the hue, which will affect the hue of this image. We have the color, and finally we have luminosity. So this is the composite mode, and it's defined whether if you want to effect the black or if you want to effect the white level of the above image onto this lower image. 33. Masking in Edit Page: Welcome back, everyone. Now go to Google and go to Images and download this PNG. Search for circle. And if you scroll down, you can open this PNG and you can download this PNG for free. Now you need to also download this Ink slash image for free, search for Ink slash, and you can click here this Itokimage and you can download this image for free. Right click and select Save Images and you can save this image. Now, once you download these images, you can import them in Edit page. Now I'm going to drag my clip in timeline, and I'm going to show you a trick to mask in dit page. So currently, we don't have any tool to mask in dit page. So we can use this trick instead. First, we can drag this clip on top of this track and go to the composite mode of this video and change the composite mode to foreground. So we are setting this video as a foreground element. Now we need to have a background element. So I'm going to drag my ink slash image below this track. I'm going to select this ink splash image, go to the composite mode. And if you select the luma or loom, as you can see, guys, we have this mask. It mask around this ink slash. If we disable the track, this is the ink slash. It adds the video outside this ink splash. If you want to add your video inside this ink splash, you can change the luma to invited luma and check this out. It adds the video inside this ink. If you want this effect to your whole video, you can drag this image and you can adjust the image duration according to your video. And as you can see, guys, we mask this ink splash onto this video. Now if you select this image and if you select the Alpha inverted Alpha, nothing is happened. So why it is happening in luma? Well, you need to have a black and white. You need to have a contrast image in order to use the luma or inverted luma. Like the composite luminosity mode, it is affecting the luminosity of your image. The luminosity is defined as the white and black level of your image. As you can see, we inverted the luma value of this image. That is why it is adding the image inside this ink splash. Now if you want to use the Alpha or in ted Alpha, you need to have a PNG image like we have this circle image. Let's increase the duration. I'm going to select the circle image, and I'm going to change the mode to Alpha. And this time, as you can see, guys, it put my video inside the circle because we have a PNG image. I'm going to change my Alpha inverted Alpha, and this time it inverted the circle, and it put my video outside the circle. Now if you want to use this as luma or inverted luma, you can also do that. But as you can see, guys, we have this transparent video. We can also do one more thing. Go to the color page. We can go to the clips, select the circle. We can increase the highlight or the gain. Let's drag this heel to the right side. We can also increase the gamma, increase the gain, increase the gamma, increase the gain, and increase the gamma. And now, check this out. If we go to the edit page, we can use Luma, we can use inverted luma. And we can also use the Alpha or inverted Alpha onto this same image. So what is happening in the Luma or in ted luma? Well, if we disable the color page adjustment, if we disable the track, as you can see, guys, my image, this is my original circle image. But if you enable the color page adjustments, this circle is now turned to a white kind of circle. So if you want to use luma inverted luma, use black and white image like we have this one, and that is why we are able to use this image as a luma or inertialuma because we turn the circle to a white or maybe a pink white. So that is why we are able to use this circle as a luma or invert aluma. So we have to change the video to foreground, change the circle to luma or invertiluma or Alpha to invited Alpha. So this way, you can mask according to your shapes. You can add your video into any shapes that you want. 34. How to Use Compound Clip: Welcome back, everyone. So in previous lecture, we learn how to do masking in dit pit. We are going to use that knowledge, and we are going to implement that knowledge in this lecture as well. So first of all, go to the pexel.com, search for inslas. If you scroll down, you can find these kinds of video. You can hover your mouse onto any video and you can preview that clip. You can simply click on this button to download any video that you want. Now, once you have your video, you can import this video in Media Pool of Edit page. First of all, I'm going to select my video, and I'm going to change the compositing mode to foreground. Let's place this video on top of this first track. I'm going to place my ink slash video below this track. So let me disable my first track, and this is the ink slash video. Now in order to mask, like we have this ink splash, we have to use this video compositing mode, ma value or inverteloma. If you set the luma value, it will mask outside this ink splash. But if you inertiloma, then it will mask inside this ink splash. Now we have this video. Now I'm going to trim my first clip, and I'm going to also trim this video as well. I'm going to duplicate this video by pressing the old key, hold it, and we can select this video. We can drag this video to the right side. Now I'm going to drag my second clip, and I'm going to connect these two clips together. Now, I'm going to also trim this clip to match the duration of this ink splash. Now I'm going to select this clip, and I'm going to change the compositing mode to foreground. Now, as you can see, guys, we have the first video appearing like this, and we have the second video, appear like this. But what if you want these two video appear on top of this video. You can also select these two video drag and you can also place them right here. And as you can see, if we play the video, we have this effect. But as you can see, guys, we have several tracks. To manage all the videos, we can do one more thing. We can merge these two videos together by using the compound clip. So the compound clip is used to merge multiple clips into one single clip. So I'm going to select these clips, right click, and as you can see, we have compound clip. We can create a new compound clip, so I'm going to name the two first clip. And as you can see, now we have a single clip instead of multiple stack clip. I'm going to select this clip as well, right click, create a new compound clip. I'm going to name this second now I'm going to place this clip on top of my first clip. I'm going to unlink and we can manage this audio like this. Now, again, we can link, and this time, we can select the image plus the video at the same time. Now if I play this clip, as you can see, guys, we have this clip operating like this and we have the second clip. Now we can also do one more thing. We can use the shift key and we can enlarge this track. And at the end, as you can see, guys, we have this fade in values. So at the start, we have this value. We can use the fade in like this, and at the end, we can also use this fade in value as well and check this out. The second clip will end like this. Now we can place this clip a bit earlier and now check this out. We have second clip appear and we have the first clip disappear. So we are fading in the first clip like this. So this is fade in. So we can use this point to fade in like this. So if you want to fade in the whole clip from the start, we can use this. And as you can see, it is fading away like this. If you want the fade in from the start, you can drag the first point. Now if I play this clip, we have a fade in effect, and now we have this clip up herear. So this way, you can merge two clips together seamlessly. So now we can enable this and now check this out. Now, if you want to change anything inside this compound clip, you can go to this manage timeline. You can displace tag timeline. We can simply right click. We have two options. We can decompose in place. So if you select this decompose in place using clips, as you can see, guys, it decompose all my clips in this place. Now we have the original clips in shapes. But I'm going to press Control Z. If you want to open this compound clip in a different timeline, so we can click, we can open in timeline, and as you can see, guys, now we are inside this compound clip. Go back to timeline number one. We can go to the compound clip number second and check this out. We have second compound clip. Now you can change everything that you want to change inside this compound clip. Let's say you want to change the duration of this clip. So for example, I'm going to trim this clip. If we go back to the timeline, we have the main timeline. As you can see, guys, this clip end from here. And after this playhead, we don't have anything. That is why we have this transparent screen. And we also have this dB level of this audio that indicate this clip end to this point. So we can trim this compound clip. If you want to, for example, increase the duration of this compound clip, you can also increase the duration and you can go back to your main timeline. You can also increase the duration of this compound clip. Well. Now, it will also increase to the point where you increase this value. So for example, this clip is 12 second long. If you go back to main timeline, as you can see, we are at 3 seconds of this clip. If we go to the end second, we have the 16 seconds. We have this clip. Whole duration adjust in this main compound clip. You can consider this compound clip as a brand new clip. You can adjust the inspector of this video, you can zoom in zoom out. You can change the position, rotation, anything that you want to change to this clip. You can also add effects if you want to. So I hope you understand this is how compound clips work in Edit page. 35. How to Use Power Bin: Welcome back, everyone. Now go to pxel.com and search for Light Leaks Effect. Go to videos. And if you scroll down, you can find this video. You can download this video from this download button. Now I'm going to show you how to use the Power Bean in Edit page. So enable the media pole, and as you can see, right here, we have the smart Bean. If you click here, you can show Power Beans. And as you can see, guys, we can drag this right here, we can go to the Master, and these are all my assets that I have saved, so I can use them later in any of my projects. Now, for example, I'm going to press Shift and I'm going to use my scroll to zoom out to shrink these tracks. Now go to your master folder. Now import your light leaks video in this media pool and drag your clip on top of this video. Now we can select this video. We can use the compositing mode screen and now take this out, we have this effect. We have this slide appear like this. Now I'm going to also trim this clip, place this here, and I'm going to also use the fade in value and now take this out. We have clip number to appear, and now I'm going to trim this. I'm going to use this fade out. So we have fade in and we have fade out. I'm going to also lower my opacity because the lad leak is too strong and now tack this out. Let's change this to maybe like 60. Now, for example, if you want to use this slide leak in all your other projects, instead of importing this light leaks all over again in every project, you can go to the power bin master and you can use this slide leak. By the way, if you drag this light leak, it will add this slide leak like we had in this timeline. We have this fade in and fade out value and we trim this slide dig. So it will import this exact light leak clip. Now if I import this clip, as you can see, guys, if I select and delete this clip from here, go to the Master. I'm going to select and I'm going to press Delete key to delete this clip from here. If you go to the Power Bin, we still have that clip in the Power Bin with the same fade in and fade out value with the trim value as well. So this is the benefit of using the power bin that you can use asset in every project of yours. So I'm going to delete this slide leak. Now go to the master. For example, if you want to use this ISTok ink slash image in all your projects or the circle image, you can select these two. First of all, embod this in Edit page. Go to the master. I'm going to right click and I'm going to create a new bin. So I'm going to name these two masks. Now we can go to this folder. We can drag these images, and now we have these two images. We can now delete these images from here. Now if you want to go back to the main power bin, you can simply click here to the master, and now we are here in the main power bin. You can go to any folder and you can exit that folder easily. You can save any clip, any asset. It doesn't matter. You can save them for later use. So for example, we have this ink slash video. I'm going to press Control B, select this one, press Backspace to delete this clip. I'm going to select, go to the mash, and I'm going to also drag this in mask folder. And now check this out. If we go to the mask folder, we have this video in mask folder. So this is how you can use the power bin in all your projects. 36. Changing Clip Speed: Welcome back, everyone. So before we move to the speed ramping, we need to understand the speed in general. Right now, we have two clips. I'm going to select my first clip, and by default, if you go to the speed change of your clip in Inspector, by default, the ripple timeline is not checked. So make sure you check ripple timeline. If you have one single track, so make sure you check ripple timeline. Now if you increase the speed of your video, as you can see, the second clip is also reacting with the first clip. So if we change the speed to maybe 300, it will also delete the ible and place this video next to this video. So for example, if you place this video right here and if you maybe increase the speeds like this one and you increase the speed to maybe 200, check this out. This clip is also reacting with this clip. So I'm going to connect these two clip. I'm going to change my speed to normal, which is 100. Now I highly recommend don't check the ripple timeline if you have multiple clips. So if you go to the media, I'm going to drag multiple clips in timeline. I'm going to place this clip. Let's suppose you have a clip right here. I'm going to place this right here. We don't have any audio tracks, so we can place this right here. Now I'm going to place my video to this position. I'm going to select my first clip, and I'm going to increase the speed to 200. Notice, it will also trim this clip because it will reacting with the timeline. It is deleting the ripple and it is moving the videos. So if I increase my speed, it trim the clip of this track, and we have all the other track as its original form. So I highly recommend don't check the ripple timeline if you have multiple tracks. But if you have one single track, let's pause then you can check the bel timeline. It won't hurt your tracks. Now, if you want to reverse your clip, you can simply click here. As you can see this is called Reverse. I will reverse your clip. If you want to again forward this clip, you can change the speed to forward. We have the normal speed. If you want to increase the speed, you can use this wheel. If you want to increase or lower the second of the frames, you can also do that. So basically, it is like changing the speed as well. So as you can see, if we change the speed, it is also changing the frames per second. You can see, this is my original clip duration. If I increase the speed, it shows me the duration of my clip. So let's suppose you increase the speed to 400. Now my clip is total in 1 second. Now, if you want to freeze the frame, you can click here and it will freeze the frame that comes after the play had. So for example, if you want to freeze this frame, you click here, it will freeze the frame, but it will also place this frame on top of the entire video. So now we can easily increase or we can lower the duration of this frame. This is how the speed change work intermitary resolve. 37. How to Create Speed Ramp Effect: Welcome back, everyone. Now I'm going to show you how we can do speed ramping in Dant resolve. If we go to the media pool, if you remember, in the Smart Ben lecture, we separated 60 FPS videos. Now we have this for clip. In the previous lecture, we stabilized this for clip, and now we are going to do speed ramping onto these clips. So to do the speed ramp, you have to first right click onto a clip and select re time controls. And as you can see, we have currently by default 100 speed. If you change your speed to 200, it will speed up your clip. So the 100 is by default, the normal speed of your video. Less than 100, it means your clip is in slow motion. And if you increase your speed more than 100, it means you are speeding your clip up. I'm going to do a fast speed effect, so I'm going to add a point right here. From here to here, I'm going to add another point. Now, if you want to speed up this part, all you need to do is just make this point close to each other. And as you can see, guys, the value is also increasing more than 100. And now check this out. We have fast, and now I'm going to add a slow effect. I'm going to slow down this part, so I'm going to add another point. I'm going to drag this to the right side. I'm going to lower my speed by 50%, and now we have fast and now we have slow motion. And now from here to this last part, I'm going to also speed up my clip, and now check this out. We have this speed ramp effect. Now we can also smooth out this animation we have to enable the keyframe, go to the keyframe graph. We have to click here. We have to go to the video, and as you can see, guys, we have speed ramping retime speed. So this is speed ramp. I'm going to select all my point so we can press Control A. By the way, you have to uncheck other parameter. Make sure you have not selected the other parameter. Now I'm going to select by pressing the Control A, I'm going to click here, es in and ease out. And now check this out. Let's select this point. Let's drag this right here. I'm going to select this point, drag this right here so we have more speed ramp and now check this out. Now I'm going to uncheck the keyframe. Now, the basic rule of speed ramping, if you are ending your clip in a high speed, then you also have to start the next clip in a high speed. So I'm going to select my clip, right click, go to retime Control. I'm going to change my speed of this clip to 400. And now as you can see, let's increase the speed. Let's zoom in. Now I'm going to click here. I'm going to also change the speed to 800 and now check this out. So we have the high speed. Now I'm going to also change the speed to 800 as well. And from this point, I'm going to add a point, and I'm going to slow down the speed. So we can drag this to this side. And now I check this out. Now at the end, we have the high speed, so I'm going to also start the next slip in high speed. Let's right click Go to retime change the speed to 800. And from this point, I'm going to add a point. Let's add a point right here. Slow down the speed. We can also click here. Let's change the speed to 50% and now check this out. Now we have the next clip and we have the last as well. Go to retime, change the speed to 800. Add a point right here, add a point right here, click here, change the speed to 50%. Now finally, we have to refine the animation, so go to keyframe animation. Select your clip, press Control A, selectes in and ease out. Drag this point right here and drag this value right here. Now select this clip. Click here, press Control A, select ease in and ease out. It's like this clip as well, press Control A is in and is out. Now if I play my clip, as you can see, guys, we have this speed ramp effect. Now for me, I think this part isn't working. So we can do one more thing, which is very interesting. We can click here where we have the speed slowdown. We can go to rewind and we can select 50% rewind and now check this out. Now we have rewind and now check this out. Can click here and you can also rewind this part. Or if you want to only reverse this part, you can also click here and it will reverse only this portion. So for example, if you want to reverse this portion, you can also click here and it will reverse this portion. I'm going to press Controz. So let's see if you want to reverse this portion between the point, you have to place your playhead in between this point, and then you have to click here to reverse your video. As you can see, I have selected this video, so we have to select this video, click here, and as you can see, it will reverse only this portion. And let's say, if we go to the media pool, I'm going to add another timeline right here. I'm going to drag this clip. And let's say we go to retime control, add a point right here. Let's add a point right here. Let's suppose you want to add a rewind. I'm going to add a rewind to 100 and it will automatically add a point. It will dit the reverse in between these point. And if I play my clip, let's increase the speed to 200. Now check this out. So I'm going to reset the speed. I'm going to click here. Rewind 200, and now it will automatically add this reverse point. Now, if you want to add a rewind effect onto a specific location, then you have to add two points like I have right here, and then you have to go to rewind and you have to add your rewind effect. And it will add that rewind effect in between your points. So if you mistakenly add a point, so for example, I'm going to add a point right here. If you mistakenly add a point and you want to remove a point, so you have to select the value that comes after the point that you want to delete, and you have to select clear speed point, and it will delete the point. Now let's say I want to remove this speed point. Now I have to select the value that come after this point. So I'm going to click here, select clear Speed Point, and it will remove this speed point. I'm going to press Contos to undo my action. So this way, you can easily remove any point. 38. Low FPS Speed Ramp: Hey. Welcome back, everyone. So in the previous lecture, we do spin wrapping effect onto higher frame rate videos, 60 FBS videos. Now, what happen if you slow down a lower frame rate video? So I'm going to slow this video by 50%, and as you can see, guys, we have this itr motion going on. So to overcome this problem, we have this feature called re time and scaling. In retime process, we can select optical flow. And as you can see guys, if I play my clip, we have this smooth motion. If we disable this, this is before we have a jittery effect. I'm going to also slow this even more so we can clearly see what is happening. And now you can clearly see we have this jittery motion. Now if I enable this, as you can see, guys, we have this smooth motion going on. Can also select the motion estimate. So I'm going to select enhance better. If you want to have a scaling, you can also select this as well. If you resize, you can also select this. It will help you to get better results. So I'm going to select smoother and now check this out. So let's say if you did not select the motion estimate, if you select the project setting, as you can see, guys, let's select the project setting as well. Now, check this out. Even with a single option retime process, we are getting this kind of result. Let's enhance better and select smoother. So this way, you can slow down that video that don't have high frame rate. So if we go to the media bit, as you can see, all these videos are AI generated, and they all have 24 FPS. So this is the best way to slow down the video that does not have high frame rates. Now let's do speed ramping effect onto this video. So I'm going to change my speed to 800. And now I'm going to add a point to this place. Let's add a point right here and I'm going to click here, change the speed to 25%. Let's change 400, And I'll select 400 here as well, or maybe 200 because the 400 is not looking good. So yes, 200 is good. We have 25, and we have 200 again. Now let's select the second clip. I'm going to replace this clip right ta. Go to speed ramping, re time control, change the speed to 200. Let's add a point right here. So we also have to select this video, go to re time and skiing and select optical flow and select enhance better. And we can also select the smoother. And now if I play my clip, as you can see, guys, we have this spin ramming effect going on. We can also go to the keyframe, select this clip, click here, press Control A, and select ease in and ease out. I'm going to select this clip, click here, press Control A, ease in and ease out. And now here is the final result. So I think we have to add another clip, and I'm going to also flip this clip, go to re time Control. Change is to 200 add a point right here and I'm going to add a point right here. Click here. I'm going to change speed to 25%, and I'm going to use optical flow. Press Control A, select ease in and ease out. Track this point right here. I'm going to track this point right here. Now we can close this by clicking on this cross button. We have to also select enhanced better and smoother. Isn't this beautiful? So this is how we can do the speed ramping onto lower frame rate videos in the inch resolve. I 39. How to Freeze Frame: Welcome back, everyone. So now I'm going to show you how we can freeze frame Ita venti resolve. We have several ways to freeze frame. First way, if you want to freeze this frame of this video, you have to select your video, go to the inspector, and you have to go to the speed change. And as you can see, we have this snow on. If you click on it, it will freeze the frame that comes after this playhead. As you can see, it freeze all the video. We can also increase or lower the duration of this freeze frame. Now I can reset this, I'm going to undo my action, press Control Z. Now the second way we can select this clip, go to the clip, and as you can see, we have clip speed, and in clip speed, we have freeze frame. Shortcut key is Shift R. If you select this, it will freeze all the video. Now, these are now the best way to freeze frame of your video. The best way is you have to place your playhead onto a frame that you want to freeze. So for example, I want to freeze this frame. So I'm going to place my playhead onto this position onto this frame. I'm going to right click and select re time and Control. Click here and as you can see, we have freeze frame. If you select this, it will freeze this frame. Now you can lower the duration of this freeze frame by dragging this point close to each other, or you can drag this to the right side to increase the duration of this freeze frame. And now check this out. If I play my clip, we have normal speed. We have freeze frame, and now the video play like this. Now let's go to title, and I'm going to select this one. Let's place this title onto this freeze frame. I'm going to select my title. I'm going to type no head lights. Let's change this to Italic, or let's say light Italic. Go to the settings and we can change the position. So I'm going to change the position. Now, by using the freeze frame, you can have interesting visuals in your videos like I have. 40. Adding Transition: Welcome back, everyone. Now I'm going to show you how we can apply transition in dit bit. First of all, you have to enable the effects, and in toolbox, we have video transition right here. Now in this folder, we have so many transition. To apply the transition, you can select a point between your video. And for example, if you want to apply this transition, by the way, you can preview any transition by hovering your mouse from left to right like this. Let's say you want to add this transition. We can simply right click onto this transition and we can select Add to selected it point and clips. And as you can see, this point is green. So it means we have selected this point. We can add the transition and this message will pop up. So as you can see, in order to add a transition, we also have to trim the clip. So if you click on it, it will also trim your clip a little bit. And now we have this transition. You can also select your transition. You can drag the end part of this transition. You can increase or you can lower the duration of this transition. By the way, you can also increase the duration. For example, if you want your transition to have in 1 second duration, you can change this. This is the maximum duration of this transition, which is 1 second. Now we can also customize this transition even more. As you can see, we can add this potter. We can change the color of this potter as well. You can also add this, and now we have this feather. And now this is how it looked like. You can also change the transition type. We have so many transition type. You can change your transition type like this. You can select any transition type. And you can also customize that transition. Now, we also have the alignment. If you select this one, as you can see, it shift the transition to the first clip. And now as you can see guys, we have this effect. The transition is applied onto one single clip. But if you look at the second clip, the second clip is starting without any transition. But if you select this one, as you can see guys, now we have the transition in between these two clip. If you select this one, it will apply this transition to this clip, and we don't have any transition effect going on onto the first clip. So I think this look much better than before. Now I'm going to select the transition. I'm going to press delete key to delete this transition. Now we can scroll down. We can select any transition we can add this blog lead transition. Now I'm going to scroll down and I am going to add a transition. So let's preview this transition. Let's see which one looks better. Let's add this. You can also drag and rob your transition onto clip. If you want to add this to the first clip, you want to add this to the second clip, or you want to add this in between these two clip. Now, let's say you want to add transition to all the clip. If you want to add one transition onto all clips, you can simply select your clip. You can right click and you can select Add to selected dit point. Now we also have to trim this clip as well. We can lead the transition and now check this out. We have transition right here, right here, and we have right here. We can select the transition. Also, we can add motion blur. So as you can see, we don't have any motion blur. If you check this, now we have this motion blur. So this one without the motion blur and now we have the motion blur. So I think with the motion blurr, the transition will look fantastic. So I'm going to add by default motion blur and now check out the result. Now, instead of selecting the in between point, you can also select two clips. Like, for example, if you want to add transition onto these two clip, you can simply select these two clip and you can add a transition like maybe you want to add this one, so we can right click Add to Selected Point and now check this out. But this way, it will also add transition to the start and to the end point of your clip. The best way to add transition is to simply just drag and drop your transition in between your clips. This is the simplest and the best way to add transition. 41. How to Create SlideShow: Welcome back, everyone. Now we are going to create slideshow effect in the to dissolve by using the transitions. Now if I scroll down, as you can see, I have several images which I downloaded from pxeldt com. You can search for cards, and you can find these pictures on pxel.com. Now, first of all, we have to add these images into a different folder. So we can access these images easily. I'm going to right click right here in my smart Bin. By the way, if you don't have the Smart Bin, you can click here in the media pool and you can also click here to show the SmartPin. This is the one. Now we can right click right here at SmartBN. I'm going to name these two picks, and we can go to the file name, and if you scroll down, we have these frames. So I'm going to press one because the images contain one frame and I'm going to create. And now it will separate these images into one folder. So if you go to the media page, as you can see, guys, these are some images. And if you change the view to list view, as you can see, the type is still, and the frames is one. If you go to the collection, as you can see, guys, the type is Video plus audio, and this is the image. If you look at the frames, image frame is contained one single frame because we have the image. That is why it contained one frame. So this is the reason why I have selected one frame. Now I'm going to add this picture in the timeline. So I'm going to select this one, press Shift, hold it, and select the last one. It will select all these images. I'm going to drag and drop these images in my timeline. By default, the image duration is 5 seconds. So for example, if you want to change the duration by default, you can simply go to the dissolve, go to the preferences, go to the user, and go to the editing. You can see, this is the standard still duration. This is for picture. I'm going to change this to 3 seconds, click on the save button. And now if we select all press lead key, drag these in timeline. Now check out by default duration. Now we have three second duration on every single image. Now as you can see, guys, these are all the images. So to animate these images, we can select all these images and we can enable Dynamic Zoom. Instead of enable dynamic Zoom in every single image, we can also enable Dynamic Zoom by selecting all the images and now check this out. So we add Dynamic Zoom. Now we are going to add some transition. So instead of selecting all the clips, we are going to add random transition, so it won't look boring. So I'm going to select these pictures go to the video transition, and I'm going to select this one, right click Add to selected it points. Now it added this transition. Now we have to add transition between these two clips. So if you select this picture and if you add this transition, it won't add the transition because we have the transition at the end and at the start of these two clips. And this clip is in between these two clips. So that is why it won't add the transition. So we have to delete this and we have to also delete this end transition. Now I'm going to select these images by pressing Control and selecting each one by one, and I'm going to add this transition. Now we edit this transition. If you look at the result, this is the final result. Now, as you can see, guys, all these images are in different resolution. So we have to go to the video, and I'm going to add a Zoom. And now if we enable the dynamic Zoom, as you can see, guys, now we have this picture. Now we don't have this empty background, so we can also so I'm going to also create the Zoom and now check this out. Now, by the way, you can also add this motion blur onto these transitions, but you have to select each transition one by one. But if you don't want to spend time on every single transition and check motion blur, you can simply right click onto a transition where you add it to the motion blur, create transition preset, and we can name this to pan up motion blur. And if you click on Okay button, as you can see, guys, if we search for pan, we have the transition pan up motion blur. And now if I delete this transition and select this clip right click and I add it to the selected point, as you can see, guys, by default, we have the motion blur. If you select the transition, as you can see, by default, it's check the motion blur. So this way, you won't have to spend any time on adding these transition one by one, you can simply create your customized transition and you can apply that transition. So I'm going to select my clip. To select it point and now check this out. By default, we have this beautiful motion blur. So this is how you can create beautiful slideshow in Deming dissolve. 42. Learn Clip Stabilization: Welcome back, everyone. So if you have a shaky video and you want to stabilize that video, we can do that easily in the venture resolve. I'm going to disable the effect and media pool, I'm going to drag this down and let's change this to vertical so we can clearly see the option. If you want to stabilize your kit you have to select your clip. You have to go to the inspector and you have to click here to stabilize your clip. As you can see, guys, I have different kind of videos where we have different kind of shake. First of all, I'm going to select my first clip, and as you can see, in this clip, we are just zooming in, and we have a less shake. For example, if you are moving the camera like this, your camera is just changing the position like this. If you want to stabilize a clip where you are not moving the camera, better option is similarity and translation. As you can see in stabilization, we have three mode perspective, similarity and translation. So similarity and translation work better if you have position shake. But if you are changing the perspective, as you can see, guys, the camera is right here, and we are moving the camera from one point to a different point. Have three examples of this as well. Perspective mode work better for these kind of shakes. So first of all, we have this video, so I'm going to select similarity. I'm going to click on the stabilize button. And as you can see, guys, the video is stabilized. Now if you select different mode like if you select the perspective, you will get a little bit wiggle in your video. So as you can see, guys, if I play my clip, Notice the background, it is wiggling a little bit. So that is why we are going to use the similarity for this kind of shake because we are not moving the camera too much and now check this out. So if I uncheck my stabilization, this is before, as you can see, the video is shaking. And if we enable this, this is after. Look how smooth we got. If you want to smooth out this even more, then you have to drag this slider to the right side. You have to increase the smooth value. So I'm going to add 0.5, and you have to also click on the stabilized button. So for example, if you change any values of this parameter, then you have to click on the stabilized button. Again, in order to stabilize in your latest parameter values. Now, as you can see, we have this smooth video. So if you are getting this kind of wiggle, then you have to lower your smooth value. And now if we stabilize this, as you can see guys, now we have less wiggle than we had before. By the way, if you want to lower your crop ratio, you can also lower the crop ratio as well, and then you have to stabilize again. So this is before and this is after. If you stabilize the video, it will also crop and zoomed in your video. If you uncheck the Zoom, as you can see, guys, this is without the Zoom. Now, if you check the Zoom, it will zoom your video. We also have a feature where we can lock the camera and it will lock on a person or an object. So in this example, we have this microphone as an object. If you check the camera lock and you click on the stable Lice button again, as you can see, guys in the whole video, it will lock your subject into one place. So as you can see, we are not moving at all. I'm going to uncheck this. Let's click on the stabilize button again, and now we have this mode video. Now in this example, as you can see, guys, I use perspective mode and I stabilize my video on by default settings. So this is before. As you can see guys, the video is shaking a little bit, not too much, and this is after stabilization. Notice how less we have shake in this udo now we have this example. So this is before. As you can see, guys, we are changing the perspective and we have a shaky video. Now I'm going to turn on my stabilization, and with the perspective mode, as you can see, guys, this is what we got. Now, what if you select other mode in a perspective changing video? So I'm going to select my translation mode and now check this out. We are getting this kind of weird wiggle. So try to select other mode if you are not getting the result what you want. So try to change your mode. And this is with the perspective mode. Now we have this final video. As you can see, guys, we have this extreme shake and we also changing the perspective. So I'm going to select the perspective mode, click on the Stabilize button, and now check this out. Now if you select other mode in a perspective changing video, you will get weird hicles. Like, as you can see, guys, we are getting this kind of weird vehicle. If you select the similarity or translation in a perspective changing video, you will get this kind of weird wiggle. Now, here is the result of perspective. So, guys, this is how we can use the stabilization in the Min chi resolve. 43. How to Use Attribute: Welcome back, everyone. So in the previous lecture, we create this beautiful slideshow, but we have a problem. Some images contain different resolution. That is why we have this transparent background. But to overcome this problem, we can zoom these images like this and we fix the problem. But as you can see, guys, so many images contain this error. So how can we fix this problem? Number one solution is we can increase the Zoom each image one by one, or we can increase the zoom of one image and copy that zoom value and apply that zoom value to all other images. That is called attribute. So as you can see, guys, in this image, I'm going to first of all, select all my images unchecked dynamic zoom. So we can clearly see these images. Now I'm going to increase the zoom of this image. Let's say we can apply 1.4. If you right click, if you copy, and I'm going to select the images that contain different resolution. I'm going to right click and I'm going to paste attribute. Now if you select Paste attribute, it will show you the attribute that you are copying and pasting onto this clip. So we are pasting Zoom X and Zoom Y. So we are pasting this value. So now we can apply and now check this out. We automatically fix the problem. Now we don't have transparent background. So let's apply the attribute to this clip as well, and boom, we fix the problem. Now if we select all the clips, apply Dynamic Zoom, check out the result. We don't have that problem anymore. So this way, you can copy and paste any effects of one clip to another clip. I'm going to show you another example. So I'm going to click here. I'm going to add a new timeline. I'm going to drag my image right here, go to pit and I'm going to also add this image. We have two images. Now let's go to the effects. Let's close this. Let's cancel the search. We can go to the open effects, and I'm going to add this Zoomler. Now, as you can see, we apply this Zoombler onto this image. What if you want to apply this same zoom onto all the other images? We can simply right click select Copy, select all the other images, right click and paste attribute. As you can see, guys, it indicates that we are pasting a plug in. So this is all plug in, so we can apply and now check this out. Now we have the Zoombler onto every single image. So this is the benefit of using the attributes. Not only you can copy attribute, you can also remove any attribute. So in the timeline, some images are not matching the resolution of the timeline. What if you select that image and you apply the Zoom effect? Now we can copy, we can select all the images, and we can paste attribute. Now, as you can see, it also zoomed in the images that was okay before. If we look at the inspector, we added this zoom value to all these images, which was not matching the resolution and which was also matching the resolution of this timeline. So in this case, you can select those images or video that you want to remove the attribute from. You can right click and you can select remove attribute. And now, as you can see, it has also selected the other attribute which was not applied onto this clip. So in this case, what you can do, you can uncheck this and you can only check Zoom. If you apply, as you can see, now, the values is reset to one. Now the reason why I selected only the Zoom value is because if you selected all attributes, it will do this. It will also lower the duration of your clip to one frame because the images contain one frame. So after one frame, if we use archy, after one frame, your picture will end. So now, as you can see, you can't really increase the duration of image is because you removed all the attributes of this image. So we can press Control Z to undo this action, and we can only select that attribute that you want to remove from pictures. 44. Master Adjustment Layer: R. Welcome back, everyone. In the previous lecture, we use attribute of one clip and we paste that attribute to all the clips. So now all the clips have the same effect, but we can use adjustment layer to add one effect onto all these layers down here. Now the attributes come in handy. If you want to apply one video effect onto some videos, but not all the videos. But the adjustment layer comes in handy. If you want to add one effect onto all the layer down here. So I'm going to delete all my pictures, go to picture folder and I'm going to select and at the picture in timeline. So as you can see, guys, some pictures have different resolution, so I can increase the Zoom, right click, copy, and I'm going to select all the clips, all the pictures that have resolution, I'm going to paste the attribute of Zoom. Now this is okay because we apply this effect onto some clips. That is why we use attributes. But the adjustment layer is used to apply one effect or multiple effect onto a single layer, and it will effect all the layer that is down here. Let's suppose we go to open effcs and I want to add the Zoom bler. We can add the Zoomler. We can click here and we can select open effects. Now as you can see, we can add this effect onto all the now, as you can see, in this car, we have this motion blur placed here. So if you want to place this motion blur right here, it will change the position of the motion blur in every single image because we are changing the motion blur in one layer, not multiple layer. I'm going to place my motion blur right here. We can also change this. I'm going to press B. We can access this blade edit mode. Now we can cut this now we can select this adjustment layer. Now consider this as a new adjustment layer. Because if we delete this adjustment layer, the other parts still remain in the timeline. So you can add multiple cards to your adjustment layer if you want, and you can make multiple adjustment layer. If you delete this part, you can also lower the duration or you can also increase the duration of your adjustment layer. Now I can press B on the keyboard, access this blade added mode. I can cut this press A, now I can change this motion blur and I'll check this out. Now you can also use multiple effect. So I'm going to go to the effects. I'm going to delete this effect. We can add, let's say, scroll down. We can add camera hk, scroll down, we can add let's glow effect, light rays effect, and one single effect I want to add, which is called ambos effect. Now, once you add this effect, we have to change this to ambos over. If we disable all the effect, this is before and this is after. It acts like a sharpness. So you can change this as well. I'm going to set my two ambus and now check this out. You can also change the angle if you want, like this. Now let's add other effect. This is lighter effect. So if you scroll down, as you can see, this is a light rays effect. I'm going to disable my ambas effect. I'm going to place my light rays effect right here. I'm going to increase the length, lower the softness, increase the brightness, lower the gain a little bit, and lower the saturation to zero. We can also change these to edges as well, and now check this out. Let's lower the brightness as well. Let's keep this right here. This is good. Now we can apply the emboss effect, go to the glow, and we can play around with the glow. So we can spread this. We can increase the gamma a little bit. And we can lower the saturation to zero. Now let's go to the shake effect. And as you can see the shake is too month so we can lower the speed. And if we play the clip, now we are good to go. Now I'm going to select all these layer, go to inspector, go to Dynamic Zoom, add the Zoom, swap Dynamic Zoom to ease out, and now check this out. Now we can select all these layer, right click, create a new compound clip, go to speed, and I'm going to change my speed to 200 and now check this out. So this is how we can use adjustment layer. 45. Learn TakeSelector: Welcome back, everyone. Now we will look at TakeSelector. So what is the TakeSelector? Now, as you can see, guys, right here, we have the three clip Wo shot at the same location, but with different camera angles. Now I'm going to press Control and I'm going to select all these three clip. I'm going to do right click. And if we go to the clip operation, right here, we can create a new bin with selected clips. So click here. Now we have this new bin. We can click here to rename this bin to multi take. I'm going to place my first lip in timeline. I'm going to right click and I'm going to select this TakeSelector. Now as you can see, we have this interface. Now I'm going to select this to clip. I'm going to drag and rope this clip into this T selector. Now as you can see, guys, these clip are now lined up. So we can select this take. We can select this tick not only the TakeSelector work with the same video with different camera angles, but it will work with different videos. So after this example, we will import different video. So first of all, I'm going to select intake. You can click here and it will increase the audio and the video that is outside this take selector. If you want to delete any take, you can select that take and you can also click here to delete that take. Now, as you can see right now, it's showing this clip, which is sync one clip. If you select this clip, it will show you the sync three clip. If you want to get out from TakeSelector, you can click here. You can close this TakeSelector. And again, if you right click, as you can see, now it will ask you to finalize your You can click here and it will finalize this as your final But if you right click and go to TakeSelector, it will again ask you to select a Now I'm going to select this take. I'm going to close this TakeSelector, right click, and I'm going to click on Finalize. And now check this out. Now if you right click, you go to TakeSelector, we don't have that clip anymore because we finalize this clip. Now I'm going to again, right click go to TakeSelector and go to other clips like we had in timeline, go to Master. And I'm going to drag this clip right here. Now we can scroll down. We can drag this clip as well. We can drag this clip as well. Now as you can see, we have this clip intake selector. We can select this one. It will show you this clip, we can select this one or this one. Now it will also switching the audio as well. If you notice, if you select this one, it will switch the audio of this clip. If you select this one, it will switch the audio of this clip. And same goes to this clip as well. Now let's pause you select this one after 15 seconds, this clip and so we don't have anything. So we have this transparent screen. Now, let's get out from the TakeSelector. And as you can see, if we finalize this, now we have this clip. So this is how you can select your take by using the TakeSelector. 46. How to Use MultiCam: Welcome back, everyone. Now I will show you a feature of a ventil that solves all of your problem. It will save so many time of yours. It is called multicam. So if you go to the cut page like the sync bin, multicam is a similar thing, but it is more powerful and you can use it very easily. First, as you can see, we have these three clip which we shoot with different camera angle. I'm going to drag this clip in timeline. Let's place them onto each other so we can clearly see what is happening. I'm going to select all my clip right click and I'm going to select Auto align clip using the waveform. And now as you can see it aligned all my clip. Now we can trim this clip and now check this out. We have this clip aligned. Now to use the multicam, we have to create compound clips of this clip. So I'm going to click create a compound clip, call this clip one create. Let's delete this right click, create compounds, call this clip. Number three, create delete this compound clip and final, create a compound clip for this one and name these two clip one, and we can delete this video. Now, as you can see, we have these three clip. I'm going to click on the title, and I'm going to rename this two clip number two. Now check this out. We have three clip. I'm going to select all three clip, right click, and I'm going to create new multicam clip using selected clips. Now I'm going to click on Create and as you can see, we have this clip with this icon, which indicate multicam. I'm going to drag this in timeline. Let's hide the inspector. Let's click to switch to do a screen. Click here and I'm going to switch to multicam. Now check this out. We have three angle. We have angle number one, two, and three. So to edit fast, by using the multicam, we can use the number key. So for example, number one is angle number one. Number two is angle number two and number three is angle number three. Now I'm going to play my video. Press number two, number three, number one, this is the final output. Number three, one number three to one number number two, number one. So as you can see, guys, by using the number key, we automatically added this cut. If we switch to single screen, if I zoom in, let's hide the media pool as well. As you can see, guys, we edit this video without any struggle. So this is how we can use multicam in Edit page. Now in the next lecture, we will go to Advance editing by using the multicam. So make sure you watch that lecture. 47. Create Interesting Effect With MultiCam: Welcome back, everyone. Now we will do some nice editing by using the multicam. First of all, I'm going to drag my clip in Table, and I'm going to create a new compound clip. I'm going to name the two clip number one. Now this time, I'm going to increase my Zoom. Now, again, I can create another compound clip, name this to clip number two. We can delete this drag the first clip in timeline. Go to the effects, go to the open effects. Scroll down when we can use the transform effect. Now, scroll down, we can go to the image adjustment, and we can use edge rounding. We can also search for drop shadow effect. And now as you can see, we have this beautiful drop shadow. We can go to the drop shadow. We can increase the shadows strength. We can lower the blur, and we can also lower the distance. We can also change the angle as well. Let's change the color to white and click Okay. Now I can again right click create another compound clip, and we can name this to clip number three. But before we do that, I'm going to cancel this. I'm going to again go to the transform. Let's zoom out a little bit. And we can use the Yo effect like this reset the pitch effect. Now I can change the position right here. Now let's create clip number three. Now suppose you are editing a video where you want to place a person reacting or playing video game. So I'm going to add a clip. I'm going to add this clip and I'm going to go to the podcast. I'm going to select this clip right click create new multicam clip. Click on Create, and we can drag this clip on top of this clip. So basically, we are creating a reaction video or a gameplay video of a person. I'm going to lower the dreion to match with this clip. Now we can hide the inspector, hide media pool and effect. And as you can see, guys, we have to switch to multicam. Now this person is talking, so we can place this as angle number one. Now if I play the clip, and now check this out. He is playing video game, and if he start talking again, so let's increase, and now we can increase the duration as well. We can add this quick zoom in and zoom out factor as well. And now check this out. We added this entire video without using the mouse, we just use the keyboard instead. Now, for example, if you want a smooth zoom from here to here, you can use transition as well. So if we go to the video transition, we can use this cash Zoom, and now we have this smooth Zoom effect. Go to the inspector. Let's add motion and now check this out. This way, you can add as many element as you want to add in your video, and after that, you can create a new multicam clip, and you can edit your video very easily by using your keyboard. 48. How to Use Fusion Effects: Welcome back, everyone. Now let's talk about Fusion effects. In previous lecture, we have used open effects, but we haven't used the Fusion effects. So how can we use this effect? To access to this effect, you have to go to the effects. And for example, if you want to add this drone effect, you can add this effect on top of a video or you can go to the effects and drag this adjustment layer on top of this clip. Now we can add this effect on top of the adjustment layer. And as you can see, guys, we have these controls. Now we can increase or we can lower the size target. We can also increase or lower the globe brightness. We can also increase the globe size as well. If you want to add a color effect, you can also do that like this. Let's add this effect, this color, and I'm going to also increase the contrast. I'm going to lower the gain. Let's lower the contrast as well, and let's lower the saturation a little bit. So now, as you can see, we have this draw target. The best part of using the fusion effect is the open effects, we can select the fusion overlay, and now we can change this effect on top of this preview window. Now I'm going to delete this effect, and I'm going to use a different effect. So now let's use this digital glit. And as you can see, guys, we have this beautiful glit can also increase or we can lower the width or the height, and we can also play around with this glitch chroma scale. So let's lower the scale. And by the way, we can also control this glow on this preview window like this. And now if I play the clip, check this out. Now let's delete this effect as well. Let's suppose you want to create a reaction video. So we can drag this on top of this, and now we have this video in a box, but we are using the adjustment layer, so we have to delete the adjustment layer. Now I'm going to drag my clip in timeline on top of all these video which we are using these two clips from the start of this course. I'm going to drag this effect on top of my clip and now check this out. We can drag this clip right here. Now we have a reaction. We can also increase or we can lower the size and now check this out. If I play this clip, we can also disable this and now check this out. You can also play around with the rotation as well if you want to. You can also change the perspective if you want to and you can play around with the border blend as well, and now check this out. We have this reaction. Not only this, you can also create flying flag. So in the picture, I have this Spider Man picture which I generated using Kling AI. I'm going to drag the flying flag on top of this and now check this out. We have this premade flag animation. The best part is we can customize this we can change the position of the flag and now check this out. It will react differently. We can also change the position as well. We can rotate this. We can lower or we can increase the size. We can also flip this as well. If you want to have extreme wind flack, we can also do that and now check this out. So this is the benefit of using the fusion effect. You can call this effect a pre made effect or preset because these are highly designed effect that we can use in all of our projects like we are using right now, this is heat distortion. Without spending any time, we have created heat distortion. You can increase the detail. You can lower or increase the contrast, lower the brightness or increase the brightness and check this out. If you want to invert it, you can also invert this and now check this out. Now we have another interesting effect in fusion effects called After stroke. So if we go to the open effects, I'm going to scroll down and I'm going to apply the transform effect onto my clip. Now I'm going to scroll down and in image, I'm going to create this rounding effect. Let's right click and create a new compound clip. The reason why I am creating a compound clip is because the compound clip is now acting like a new clip. If we press Contos and as you can see, right now we have transform effect, which is the open effects. And if we go to the effects folder and apply out a stroke effect, now as you can see, nothing is happening. The reason behind it is because we are using open effects in a different tab and we are using the fusion clip in different tab. But if you crop your video, let's say I'm going to go to the open effects, I'm going to disable the transform effect. Now, if I crop my video, now you will notice that the outer stroke effect is now effecting our clip. It's because this is the main clip parameters and this is the effect parameter. So let's say you add this open effects. Let's go to video reset all the properties of cropping. Now if we create a new compound clip, now the compound clip would act like a new clip. Now if we apply the outer stroke right now, as you can see, now it will effect the circle and now check this out. We can easily manipulate this video. We can change the position. Let's go to the transform. Let's place this right here, lower the zoom a little bit. Check this to disable this and now have a look. So this is how we can use fusion effects in the venture resolve. 49. How to Use Lens Correction: Welcome back, everyone. Now, what is the lens correction? Well, it is used to fix the lens distortion. So first of all, to use the lens distortion, you need a studio license of Dawn resolve. To use ns distortion, we can click on the Analyze. It will analyze the clip, and as you can see, it will lower the distortion in your clip. You can also manually use this slider to lower the duration of your clip. Now, don't worry. If you don't have the license for the studio version of DaVinci Resolve, you can use this trick. If you go to the effect and if you go to the open effects and scroll down all the way to down here, and as you can see, this is called lens distortion. By the way, this is also for studio user, so we are not going to use this. Now we can delete this hide the effects. We can simply go to the Fusion tab. So this is the benefit of using the fusion. Some of the effects in Edit page are available for free in Fusion page. Now we can go to the effect and we can search for dent effect. And as you can see, we have to dent effect. If you apply this effect, we don't have any license issue. We can delete this. If you apply this effect, again, you don't have any license issue as well. So we can delete this and we can apply any of these dent effect. So I can drag this in between these two nodes, hide the effect, change these to single view. I'm going to press Control, use the scroll to zoom in and zoom out. Click here and I'm going to increase the size of this circle. Now this is the best part. We can the slider as well, and now we can lower the strength of this as well, and now check this out. You can also change the dent if you want to and have a look. Dent is work like a lens correction distortion. So this is before and this is after. Now, as you can see at the border, we have distortion effect, so you can easily fix this by dragging this transform node, and you can increase a video a little bit. And now check this out. We don't have any problem. So if I play my clip, this is before, and this is after. 50. How to Use Basic Text: Welcome back, everyone. Now let's talk about text. So if you go to the effects, and if you go to the titles, as you can see, guys, right here, we have titles. Now, right here, we have some basics title like we have left lower third. You can simply drag and drop them in timeline. You can select your text layer. As you can see guys right here in inspector, we have title. You can change the title like I want to write my name. And now if you scroll down, we have this rich text which is this one. So we can double click and we can write anything that we want. We can write resolve or anything that we want. You can customize this text. We can increase the size, we can even lower the size as well. You can add tracking, you can add line spacing as well. You can even change the underline of your text. Can change the phone style as well. Now for this text, you will get the same settings that we had for this one. Now I'm going to select my text and I'm going to press Backspace. Now, right here, we have different lower third, we have left, we have middle. In order to preview a text, you can hover your mouse from left to right. And as you can see, guys, right here, we have the text. Now in simple text in basic text, we have multi text. So if you drag this text in timeline, if you select your text, I'm going to write my name. Now I'm going to scroll down. I'm going to click here, and this is the color picker. We can change any color that we want. You can even pick a color from screen. So suppose we have this image in timeline, I'm going to place this image behind my text. So now we can select the text. I'm going to click here on the color. And as you can see, guys, we can even change the here or we can select this pick screen color. So if you click here, as you can see, if you hold your mouse onto any color, it will pick that color. So if you want your text color to like this blue car, you can select this one. You can select this color, this red color, or any color that you want, you can select that color. Let's select this one. Click Okay. If you select your image brass Backspace, as you can see, now we have that color. So what is the multi text? What is the difference between the multitex and other text? Well, in multitex unlike you want to drag your text in different layer. Now we have two text. If you click, if you select your text, we can enable the transform control. If you drag this right here, as you can see on this previous screen, we have two text. But if you want to have only one layer and you want to add multiple text, you can select this multitext. And if you want to add second text, we have three options. Either you can select this one, which is the current text. If you want to view the control of your current text, you can simply click here and you can select Fusion overlay. And now, as you can see, this is the first text. So I'm going to drag this text right here. Now I'm going to click here, and as you can see, we have this box. This box represents the text inside this box. So for example, if I copy this text and paste this multiple time, as you can see, guys, all of these texts are inside this box. If you want to increase the box, you can also increase the box, if you want to shrink the box. Now we have the text in this alignment. Can also create this amazing animation where you can just change the position like this. If you want to animate your text in this manner, in this animation style, you can go to the first you have to scroll down and go to this scroll. Now, right here, we have the still. If you select the role, as you can see, now we can use the keyframe, which is this one to animate the text like this. You can even select the scroll, and now as you can see, it will move like this. You can choose your animation if you want to add scroll or if you want to add roll. The Scroll animation only allow us to add one animation. For example, if you want to add role, you can only add role by using the keyframe. If you want to add roll, then you can only add Croll. So for example, if you want to add role animation, plus you want to add Croll animation, you can't really do that. You can only choose one in order to add keyframe animation. This is the text layout. As you can see, we have textbox layout. Now I'm going to select circle layout. If you click here, as you can see, now we have another text. I'm going to also copy and paste this text in multiple time. And as you can see, guys, it will paste this text in a circle. Now I'm going to scroll down and I'm going to increase the tracking and check this out. We have this animation. You can also drag your text right here. You can lower the size. And as you can see, guys, it is only increasing and lowering the size according to this circle. Now we can also do one more thing. We can go to the advance and now check this out. We can do this kind of stuff. We can also click here and now we can rotate this text. Now, in order to rotate your text or in order to change the layout, you have to go to the layout, as you can see, under multi text, and beside that simple text, we have layout. If you scroll down, we can change the position. We can even zoom in and zoom out this text. We can increase or we can lower the size of this circle layout. Now, if you click here, we can hide the layout. We can go to the rotation, and as you can see, guys, we can rotate this text as we want, and now check this out. We can press Control Z, or we can just add zero values in all these XYZ. We can click here and we can simply rotate the text. And as I am rotating, as you can see, the value is also changing. So you can add your text animation using the layout. Now in text, as you can see, guys, right here, we have this layer, so you can align your text as you want. So for example, if you want this text to place above all the text, you can select this text, and as you can see guys, currently, this is behind if I use my scroll to zoom in. Currently, the phase and text is behind all these two texts. So we can simply drag this on top of all the text layer, and now it is above all the text layer. Now, as you can see, we can select a text and we can customize that text. We can also delete a text and we can add a text from scratch. Now you can add as many texts as you want, and as you can see, it will appear in these layers interface. You can also go to the shading. You can add shade if you want. I'm going to click. Okay. So if we go to the nine text, I'm going to drag this right here. And as you can see, guys, we have this number text. We can change the shading of the text like this. Now, check this out. We have this kind of text. And also go to the outline, we can enable the outline. So let me just select my text number. Let's delete all these texts and select text number. One, we can scroll down, go to the shading, go to the outline, we can enable outline. And as you can see, now we have red outline. We can click here. We can change the color of this outline. If you want the outline to white, or you want black, you can simply drag this point down here. Now we have black outline. In order to see the black outline, we can drag this picture and now check this out. We can go to the effects, open effects. We can add this blur and now check this out. We have black outline. Now we can scroll down, and as you can see, we also have softness for the shadow as well. You can add glow if you want. If you want to add outer glow, you can simply change your outline to white and now check this out. We can take this, and now we have this glow effect and now have a look. Even change the glow color to any color that you want. You can go to the shadow. You can enable the shadow. You can also click here, you can change the color of the shadow as well. Go to the color picker. I'm going to select this color and now have a look. Now right now we have a picture as a background. But if you don't want a picture as a background, you can simply go to the page. Click here and you can select any color that you want. And now we have this green color as a background. We can also increase the Alpha to have the solid background, or you can also lower the Alpha to blend with the background. Check this out. Now if you want to add animation of this multitex, you can also go to the setting and you can enable motion as well. So let me just go to the outline. Now we can drag this right here. Go to the first frame. We can add a keyframe in layout center, go to the 1 second ahead, and we can simply track this right here. And now check this out. We have this animation. And if you want to add motion blur, you can simply go to the multi text setting and enable motion blur and now have a look. We have this motion blur. We can lower the shutter angle as well, and now have a look. So this is how we can use the basic text in the mint resolve. 51. How to Use Text Plus: Welcome back, everyone. Now let's talk about text plus. As you can see, in titles, we have different texts. We have scroll text, we have all the other texts. But as you can see, right here, we have text plus. So what is the text plus? First, I'm going to drag this text plus in timeline. The text plus is different than the other text. In text plus, we have the text layout transform shading and we have the motion blur as well. Now if you type anything, let's say, I'm going to type my name. We can change the font right here. We can hover the mouse on top of this font, and we can use the scroll to change the font as well. We can select any font, and we can change the regular to Italic or bolt or any other style that you want. So now it is regular, we have light. We have semilight regular semivold bold, black, et cetera. I'm going to select this one, and now I'm going to increase the size. Can also change the tracking. We can change the line spacing as well. We can change the anchor point if you want. Now, if you scroll down, we have this right on. As you can see, we can change this, and it will write on the text like this, or we can write on from start to end. We can even animate this by using the keyframe. Now let's go to the layout. And in layout, as you can see, we have point layout. If we click here and let's change the fusion overlay. And on the preview window, as you can see, we have this point layout. We can change this to text box. If we go back to text, we can type any text. I'm going to repeat my name. So I'm going to press Control C and to paste. Now let's go back to layout. Now as you can see, the text is not reacting with the box. So what you can do, you can simply click here, check this, rap to textbox, and now it will wrap the text inside this box and now have a look. We can uncheck this. You can even check the clip to textbox. And now as you can see, the text that is inside this box will only display. If we disable this, now as you can see, we have this text shown, and the other text which is outside the box is now gone. We can change the center. We can uncheck this. Let's change the center. Check this and now have a look. Let's increase the width and height, and we can even change the perspective as well. Now let's uncheck this, go to text, and I'm going to delete all the other texts. Now let's go to the layout, and now let's select this circle. And as you can see, guys, we have this circle layout. We can control the circle layout here. Now we can change this to path. And if I draw any path, as you can see, guys, the text will follow my path. Now as you can see right here, it is following the path that I have drawn. Now, have a look. We can animate this by using the keyframe. Now let's go to the text, and I'm going to reset this text. Now let's go to Layout again, and for point, we can change the rotation like this. We can change the background from black to white or into any color that we want. So I'm going to change my background to this color. Now if we switch to text box, as you can see, the layout is the same. If we switch to circle, the layout is same. If we switch patch, the layout is same. So what I can do, we can simply reset this value to zero. Now let's go to transform. Now in transform, we have first of all, character. So as you can see, guys, the line spacing it adding according to the character. I add the word, as you can see, it is now adding the space between these words. If we select the line, it will add the spacing to the line. So for example, I'm going to Control C, press Inter, I'm going to press Control V, go to transform, and now as you can see, we are adding this line spacing. Can change the offset X, we can change offset Y, and we can even change offset as well. So now I'm going to delete this line and let's select the character. I'm going to hide this. I'm going to view the rotation. And now as you can see, guys, we are rotating the text. As you can see, we are rotating according to the character, if we select the word, and now if we rotate, as you can see, now it is rotating the word. If we select the line, it will rotate the line like this. And now we have this text. Now we have the pivt. We can change the position in the pivt as well. We have the share where we can get this kind of effect. Also have the size in transform, so we can change the size by using the X and Y scale size. Now let's reset the text and go to shading. Now in shading, as you can see, it is already enabled. So first of all, let's go to the layout, and I'm going to change my color to this one. And now let's go to shading. You can see, it is already enabled, and we have selected the element, which is element number one, which is white solid fill. If we select this, if we change this, as you can see, now it is changing the color of the text because we have selected the white solid fill. If we uncheck this, it will disable this. Now let's go to the second element, and right here, the element name is red outline. If we enable this, as you can see, now we have red outline. Can change the appearance by selecting this one. This one, we have the box, and we have this bottle line box as well. Now, right here, we have opacity. We have outside only. We can select this one and now have a look. We can change the color of this outline. If you go to the gradient, as you can see, guys, if we click here, we can select the gradient. So I'm going to click here select this one. I'm going to click here and I'm going to change the color to this one. Now have a look. We have this gradient outline. We can change the mapping angle as well. We can even animate this by using the keyframe. We have the softness as well, and now have a look. We have this stylized text. We can even change apply softness to fill color as well. We can increase the glow, and we can also blend the glow. We can control glow as well. Now have a look. We can even change the position of this outline. We have the rotation as well, and we have the pivot, we have shear, which is this one, and we also have the size as well. And now have a look. We have this stylized text. Now let's scroll up, and for the third element, we have black shadow. If we enable this, we have this black shadow. Let's change the opacity of this black shadow. Now let's scroll up for the fourth element, we have blue border. If you enable this, we get this blue botter. So basically, these are pre made elements. So you can change the setting, you can create your own element. So let's disable this. And if we go to the number five element, if we enable this, nothing is happening because there is no setting applied to this element. So we can simply just select, for example, this one, we can create our own element by tweaking settings here and there. Let's select this one. Let's like this one. Going to check outside only scroll down. We can even select the joint. Let's make them round. We can change the color. Let's change the color. To this one, click Okay, we can add the softness. Let's add a glow and add this softness. Now we can even name this element outline. And now have a look. We have element number five name outline. Now right here we have the image. Image is basically the resolution of your text plus. Now if we go to the settings, we have the motion blur as well. So you can animate your text inside this text plus and you can enable motion blur. So this is how we can use text plus in DaVinci Resolve. 52. How to Use Fusion Text: Welcome back, everyone. Now, instead of animating this simple text, we have animated text. So if you go to the fusion title, right here, we have the animated text. First, I'm going to drag my image right here in the timeline. And now, as you can see, this is background review. You can preview any title by hovering your mouse from left to right. Currently, as you can see, we have this text, but if you drag this text on top of this image, and now if I play my clip, as you can see, this text will look like this. You can even customize this text. So if we click here, as you can see, the background color is black. We can change the background color to white or to this curry color, and now have a look. I'm going to select the text, press back space, and we can even delete the image as well. Now we have this text, but for the lower third, as you can see, this text appear in the lower third. We have all the other texts. We have this text, which is also very impressive. Let's increase the size and now check this out. We can animate this text like this. So I'm going to add a keyframe and now have a look. Now you will get this kind of animation, which look like we are turning off the lights. So these are not animated text, but we have also some animated text, like we have center wheel text, we have all the other texts. We have this deep, which is not animated, but a very impressive text effect. We have this digital glitch text. We have drop in. We have drop in for lower third. If I zoom out, now check this out. Even have this Aigent shadow. I'm going to track this. And now right here, we can even customize this. So as you can see, we can customize the sphere, have a look. We also have this lighting. We can check this and you will get this kind of lighting. Let's uncheck this and now have a look. Let's change this to quad, and now you will get animation change like this. So you can easily customize this text. We have this one. We have this one. This is a classic resolve text effect. We have these kind of text. I'm going to drag and drop this in timeline. And now let's scroll down. And as you can see, we can customize the text. Let's increase the copy, and let's spread them like this and now have a look. You can type any text that you want. We can even change the color of the text and have a look. Let's scroll down and we can spread the text like this. Let's delete the text. Have all the other texts like we have this ribbon text. We have the scale up. We have sign off. We have so many texts that we can customize to our liking. So without spending any time, we can use these fusion titles in our projects. 53. How to Use Basic Generator: M. Welcome back everyone. Now, after the titles, we have generators. If you go to the effects, if you go to the generators, we have these kind of generators. So what are these generators? Well, they are used in different tasks in different projects. If you want to add some effect, if you want to learn color grading, you can use this ten step. You can learn color grading by using this ten gray color palettes. We have this beep generator, which you can use for beep screen effect. We have different kind of beep. We have the four color gradient. Now, you can use this generator as a backgrounds as well. As you can see, we can change the color. Can create our own customizable background. So basically, these generator are used to create customized background. So instead of empty background or a solid color background, you can have this gradient background. You can even animate this by using the keyframe. We have this gray scale, we have another beep and we have the solid color gradient. You can select this. We have two settings as well. Like the clip inspector, we have these settings and we have generator settings, we can change the color to any solid color in this generator. Let's delete we have this window generator. We have this am generator as well. So basically, we can use these generators for background. 54. How to Use Fusion Generator: Welcome back, everyone. Now, in previous lecture, we use these simple generators, which are used for basic projects. But if you scroll down in this generator folder, we have these fusion generators, and these are very impressive pre made generators. Like we have this cartoon cloud sky, which is animated as well. We can customize this by changing the cloud separation. We can even increase the number of cloud or we can lower the number of cloud. Can even increase or lower the random set. We have the position. We have vertical, we have horizontal position. We have hue offset, which is the color of your background. We have the animation speed as well, and now have a look. Let's delete this. Now next we have this dnaor which is very impressive. Can customize this generator as well. We can select the color, and we can change the color to our liking. We can even change the line stretch as well. So I'm going to select this generator and now have a look. We have this line separation. We have the texture, and we have the speed as well. If you scroll down, we have this gradient offset and now have a look. Let's select this color and we can change the color to this one and now have a look. Can even change the angle, and now we have this background. Let's delete this. We have all the other generator as well. You can easily customize this generator. We have noise gradient, we have paper generator. We can lower the gain. We can lower the lift, lower the Gamma, increase the contrast and now have a look. Can easily animate this by changing the texture seeth. We have also very impressive generators, like we have this stage curtain, so I'm going to go to the title. Now I'm going to rack this title, and let's go to generator, scroll up and I'm going to use this stage curtain. Now we can also customize this stage curtain as well. Let's track this text right here. Let's select the generator, and we can change the spotlight. We can even customize the fold as well. We can even change the color of this curtain as well. We have the shadow, so we can blend the shadow as you can see right here, we have the shadow. This is a soft shadow, and we have the hard shadow as well. And now have a look. So this is the benefit of using the generator. These are pre made generators which we can use in our different projects. Have another impressive generator, which is the star field. Now in the star field, we can customize the number of star, and we can customize a bunch of other things. We have this animate, so we can change the animation style. We can increase the speed and now have a look. We can increase the depth as well. We can change the camera angle. We have the horizontal vertical offset. We have the Zoom as well, and now check this out. We can even add a motion blur. You can use this generator as a particle effect. So now I'm going to drag my video in timeline. I'm going to select this generator, go to settings, and we can change this to add, or we can change this to screen, and now have a look. We have this particle. Let's go to generator, go to star, and we can change the color of this particle to match the color of the sand. So let's select this color picker. Select the sand color, click Okay, and now have a look. We can even increase the duration of this generator and now take a look. For smooth preview, we can change this to quarter, and now I'm going to go to animation and we can easily change the camera angle. So first, let's disable the composite mode, and now we can easily view the camera angle. So let's change the cameraangle. I think this one is good. Let's go to star. Let's increase the number of star, and let's increase the random set. Now let's go to animate, add a motion blur, go to setting, enable composite mode, and now have a look. We added this particle effect. Now if you add motion blur, it will render your generator very slow. But if you disable the motion blur, it will play your video smooth. Now, if I check the motion blur, as you can see, it will struggle to preview my clip. So I render my clip and now have a look. This is the particle effect that we have created by using the generator. We can do one more thing. We can use the keyframe to animate the particle when the car is moving to this side. So let's do that. So I'm going to first of all, disable the motion blur. Let's preview, and now as you can see from this position, I'm going to add a keyframe and now we can customize the camera. So let's go to the previous keyframe and now have a look. This way, you can easily customize this generator as well. Now we have this generator which is contor and this is also a very impressive generator because in this donator, we have six different generator. So as you can see, we have these layers. We can change the offset X offset Y. We can customize the position, anything that you want to customize. Have the shape as well and now have a look. We can increase the scale, Let's reset this generator. Let's go to generator number two. And here we have a notebook generator. You can create a notebook effect. Let's reset this first. Go to generator number two. Let's change this to scare and now have a look. We can customize the position as well if you want, or let's change this to linear, and we have this notebook effect. You can change the line color as well. If you want, you can even soften the line can even change the color of this notebook if you want. So if you want a white notebook, you can simply just select this point and you can change the color to white. And now have a look. Let's click here and change this to pure white. So I'm going to rack this point right here and now have a go. Now we have generator number three. We can customize this have generator number four. This is also a very impressive generator. So I'm going to click here and I am going to select a different color like this one. We can even customize the softness of this line. Let's change the position. And if you want to increase the layer, you can also increase the layer and now have a look. We can even change this to linear, reflect. We can change this to square, cross. And the best part is that you can animate the position like this. Now you can also change the repeat if you want to repeat the ones you can reflect or you can ping pong. And now we have this never ending generator. You can animate the generator by using this wheel. Let's change this to radial. We have this angle as well. Let's go to generator number five, and this is also a very impressive generator because we have these layers, we can scroll down first, and I'm going to click here and I'm going to select a color. So let's select this one, scroll down. Let's select outline color as well. So I'm going to select this color as my outline. I'm going to click here and I'm going to also select a color. So let's select maybe this one. Let's scroll down and we can lower the softness as well or we can increase the softness like this. Now we have this pamine effect. We can also change this to ping pong and now have a look. We have never ending generator. Let's change this to repeat and it will repeat after the generator ends, it will repeat that generator again. We can also change the pattern type like we can change in all the other generator to cross radial angle, and to linear or to reflect as well. Let's go to the final generator. So these all the generators are made by using these settings. If you want to use these settings, you can use the setting and you can come up with your own new generator. So this is how we can use the Fusion generator in devintRsolve. 55. Animate Logo With Logo Generator: Welcome back, everyone. So not only you can use this generator in your project as an element or as a background, you can even use them as a text effect or as a logo animation. So if you scroll down all the way to the stringer transition, as you can see, we have this logo animation generator. To use this, you can simply drag this in timeline. You can click here, and as you can see, we have to select an image. Now I'm going to select the inch dissolved logo. And now if I play my clip, as you can see, we have this pre made animation logo effect. So the best part of this logo animation generator is that you can customize anything like the glow, and we can also customize the light rays as well. We can even customize the Pivt position or Pivt point, so have a look. Now the animation start like this. We can change the point and now have a look. We have this kind of animation. I'm going to select this generator. Let's reset this again. And now this time, I'm going to select this aftereffect logo. I'm going to press Alt, hold it, and I'm going to duplicate this, and I'm going to place this right here. Now I'm going to select the cap coot logo. Let's use the shift and we can use the scroll to shrink this layer. And now I'm going to duplicate this generator a couple of times. And now have a look. Within a seconds, we made this amazing animation by using this generator. If you want to customize this generator, you can change the pivot point. Let's select this one. You can change the PVD point, and now you will get different animation like this. Let's select this one, and let's change the pivot point as well. As you can see, we can easily create animations by using this generator. Now I'm going to select this past Lite key. We have this three D logo animation generator as well. We have this blend wipe. Now, the best part of these generators is that we can type a text if you want, so we can double click. We can type a text. We can even use our own logo if you want. So I'm going to click here and I'm going to select the ventures of logo. As you can see, the logo is not shown on the preview window. The reason is why the logo is not showing is because we haven't checked this used custom logo. So if you check this, it will show your logo, and now we can lower or we can increase the size of this logo and now have a look. We have several amazing logo that we can use. We have this one. Let's track this in. Let's use custom logo, and now have a look. It will look like this. Let's delete this one. We have this fold wipe. We have this genetic. We have all these amazing generators that we can use for the logo animation. Now I'm going to scroll down, and as you can see, guys, we can also control the shape as well. We can control the shape angle as well, and we can even control the color. We can customize anything. So let's select the red. Click here, change this to red, click here, change this to red. And now have a look. We have this red. Let's scroll up, use the custom logo. So this is how we can use this logo and create our own customizable logo animation. 56. Add Effects to Favorite Folder: Welcome back, everyone. So if you like any effect, you can simply add that effect into your favorite folder. So next time, if you want to use that effect again, you can easily access that effect in your favorite folder. Instead of searching for a particular effect again, you can simply add that effect into your favorite folder. Like I have this outline repeat. So if I have to find this title, I have to scroll down if I don't know the name of this title. So the best way is to add the title effect or any generator to your favorite folder. So how can you do that? First of all, let's say I want to add this as a favorite effect or title. We can simply click on the star icon, which is on the right side, at the end of this long title, we can simply click on it, and as you can see, it turned to a solid white star. Mean it added this title in the favorite folder. So go to the favorite folder. And now, as you can see, guys, let's go back to title, scroll down. We have this long shadow, long title. Let's go to favorite folder. And as you can see, we have this long shadow, and we have this long title. If you want to remove this from your favorite folder, you can simply click on it again, and it will remove that from your favorite folder. Now it will add your favorite effect title, generator, et cetera in their own folder. So for example, if I want to add this generator, and now we added this generator in my favorite folder, if you go to the favorite folder, as you can see, we have different category. We have favorite titles, and we have favorite generator. So this is the best part is that it will categorize your folders according to the effects generator or title. For example, I like this repeat effect. I can simply add this in my favorite folder. In the open ex, I like this shake effect, so I want to add this in my favorite folder and now have a look. In toolbox, we have Fusion title, fusion generator, Fusion effects, and we have another folder for open effxT is my favorite effect. So this way, you can easily access any effect, transition, generator, et cetera by adding them into a favorite folder. 57. Introduction to Fusion Page: Welcome back, everyone. Now we have the next page called Fusion, and this is the most powerful page. If you want to composite your video, if you want to add VFX, this is the most powerful page. Now, how can we import media in Fusion page? We have two options. Either we can drag and drop our media directly in Fusion page. If you go to the edit page, as you can see, now we have this media displayed. If you go back to Fusion page, right here, we have the resolution of this image, and this is the original resolution of this image. Now I'm going to first of all, delete these two, and if we go back, we don't have anything because this is a fusion composition, and inside this fusion composition, we don't have any media or anything else. So that is why we have this blank screen. Now I'm going to select my Fusion composition and I'm going to delete it. I'm going to also select my timeline, and I'm going to also delete this timeline as well. Now I'm going to import my picture, and if you want to increase, you can also do that. And if you go back to Fusion page, right now, as you can see, guys, we have this resolution, which is the original resolution of this image. If we go to the edit page and if we go to the file, go to the project setting, now my project resolution is set to ten ATP. And the picture that we have in Fusion is this resolution. This is the original resolution by the way, of this image. To fix this problem, what we can do, we can simply right click on an image or the video that you have, you can simply create a new Fusion clip. Now if we go back to the Fusion page, check this out. Now we have the latest resolution, which is a 1080 P resolution, and it matches our project resolution. So if you have 720 P resolution project, if you make Fusion clip, your project, your media resolution will be 720 P. Now in Fusion page, as you can see, we have two screen if you hover your mouse onto the media, right now, we have two dot, which is black. If you select first one, it turn white, and it display this media onto the first screen. And as you can see on the second, which is a media output, it will display this onto the second screen. If you click on it again, it will turn black, and we have a blank screen. And if you select the first one as well, it will also turn it black. So if you click on it again, we have the white dot, which means this input is now shown onto this output screen. And if you select two onto the same media, it will also display this media onto the screen number two as well. So that is why we have this dual screen. You can also, I'm going to drag this right here. You can also select your media two. You can press two on the keyboard, and it will display this onto the screen. Now, right here, as you can see, guys, we have this icon, which is called Viewer. We can drag this right here. And as you can see, we have this viewer. We can even drag this screen right here so we can clearly see. Now if you click on we have the single screen, and if you click on it again, now we have the duva screen. So you can also switch between single screen to Duvacreen as well. You can also press Control and use the scroll to zoom in and zoom out. You can use your scroll to drag this media output right here and you can also do the same with the second screen as well. So the divorce screen come in handy. If you want to see the before and after result. Let me show you what I mean. As you can see, guys, we have this blur node, I'm going to drag and drop this blur node between these two node, and as you can see, we have nothing because this is the first input and this is the final output. Now I'm going to increase my blood, and as you can clearly see guys, we have this final result, which is this one, and this is just the media. That is why it's not changing at all. If you select this one and press one on the keyboard, you can see, now this will display it onto the first screen. And if you select this one, press two on the keyboard, or you can click here. This will display onto the second screen. So this is the reason why the divorce screen come in handy if you want to see the before and after result of your VFX or composition. Like the dit page, if you select your effect or your media, the property of that selected media or the effect will be displayed onto this area, which is the inspector. Now, like the added page inspector, which displayed onto this area, the Fusion have the same inspector displayed onto this area, but we have different property. Now this is our final output. If you click here, if you disconnect the arrow, which is these two to the final output, if you go to the edit, you will got nothing. We have a blank screen. The reason why because we don't have any media out. So this is your final output. So you have to select this rag and drop this and connect this arrow to the media out. And now if we go back to the edit page, boom, we have the final output. And if you also disconnect the media, we don't have anything except this one which is this media. And if you now go back to the edit page, as you can see, guys, we don't have anything because we disconnected the input media to the final output. So now I'm going to connect this as well. Now, also, if you select your effect, press shift on the keyboard, it will disconnect this. If you want to disconnect this, you can press Shift, hold it, drag your effect, and you can let go the shift key, I will also reconnect your effect onto your media. If you want to disconnect it, you can press Shift and you can let go the left mouse boom, we disconnected this blood. If you want to reconnect this, you can simply press Shift, hold it, and you can drag this between your nodes, and now we have connected this blood between these two nodes. We can also customize the interface of vision page. So if you right click in the empty space, you can scale up your node or you can right click and scale down your node. Can also use the control and scroll of your mouse to zoom in and zoom out. We can also right click and right now we are seeing this line, so we can right click in empty space. And if we go to the option arranged tool to grid, as you can see, guys, now, this node will connect it with the grid. So this is a grid which is the background of these nodes. And as you can see guys, we can place them on top of this grid. And if we go to the arranged tool again and you disable to grid, as you can see, guys, now we can place these nodes in anywhere that we want. Can also right click and you can go to the option. And right here, we have direct pipes. So if you select this one, check this out. We can arrange the node in this manner as well. And if we turn on, let's go to the arranged tool, select the grid, check this out. Now we can even arrange our nodes in a grid and with these pipes as well. So you can better understand which input is connected with output. And we can also go to the option, select the direct pipes, and now check this out. 58. Learn Basic Nodes: Y. Welcome back, everyone. Now I know at first it look very difficult to add visual effects or edit your clip inside the Fusion page, but trust me, it's very simple once you understand the process. So first of all, we have this clip, and I'm going to first of all, turn this into a new fusion clip. Now go to the Fusion page, and as you can see, guys, we can also drag this interface right here like this. We can also press Control, use a scroll to zoom in and zoom out. So we can clearly see what kind of nodes we are using. Now I'm going to also turn this into a single screen. Going to zoom out. And first of all, let me show you the basic nodes in fusion page. So some are the basic nodes are displayed right here, like we have the blur node that we used in the previous lecture. We can select this. We can blur our video. Now, right here, I have selected the second output, which is the media out. That is why we are seeing the final result onto the screen. If you have selected, which is the media, press two, which is the output, as you can see, no matter how much amount we increase in this blood size, we don't get any result or any changes because we are seeing the final output of this media node this one. So now if I select media Opress two, we have this output. Now I'm going to also drag this, which is the brightness and contrast node after this blur node, and I'm going to select my brightness and contrast. I'm going to increase my lift. As you can see, we don't have anything, so it will take and process your output. I'm going to also lower my gain. Going to also lower my gamma. And now, right here, as you can see, we have this. I'm going to select my blur. We can also disable this right here. We can also reset this and we can even select the blur node. We can press delete key to delete this as well. So now right here, I'm going to increase my contrast and I'm going to just increase my lift. I'm going to increase my brightness, lower the saturation, and you can also select these RGB as well. So let's lower the gain as well. As you can see, we are doing the editing in the Fusion page. This is the player of the Fusion page. You can also select this to make this a loop, and now it will run this video in a loop. We can also stop this and we can go to the next clip. Currently, we don't have any clip. If you want to see how much clip you have, you can simply go to the clips. As you can see, we currently have first clip, which is this one, and we don't have any clip. If we go to the edit page, we can drag this video right here. And now if we go to the Fusion page, right now, we have two clip. If you select this clip, it will take this clip into the Fusion page, and now we can edit this clip in Fusion page. If you select the first one, now we have the first clip in Fusion page. We can disable the clips. You can also go to the effects, you can apply some effects. Now, don't worry, we can come to these effects later. Now we have the brightness and contrast node. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to drag this color corrector node, and I'm going to apply this color right here. Check this out. Now, right now we are seeing the final output. If you select this one, press one on the keyboard. Now, as you can see, guys, we are seeing the color corrector in the first output. To switch to do a screen, we can simbly click here and now check this out. Now, if you notice slightly, the first output is a little bit lighter than the final output because in the final output, we also add some brightness and contrast. So that is why we are seeing the darker version in the final output. You have selected this one, press one on the keyboard, and now I'm going to select this one, press two on the keyboard. Now check this out. Now we can compare the result. This is the reason why I'm telling you, we use Duo screen to see before and after result. Now you can also add the curve node as well. You can drag this right here. Now, these are all the single nodes, which mean we don't need any other nodes in order to use these nodes. These are the single nodes. I'm going to select my curve and I'm going to select the RGB. Going to rack this up. As you can see, nothing is changing because we have selected this on the second screen. We have selected this on the first screen. So make sure you have selected your final output, press two on the keyboard, and now we are seeing the final output. Now I'm going to select my curve, drag this up right here and I'm going to also lower the contrast, check this out. Now we can also press Shift plus space, and now we have this select tool pop up. We can search for an effect. So I'm going to search for the glow effect. I'm going to select this glow and I'm going to add. And as you can see, it automatically add this after the output. So what we can do, we can disable this from here, click here. We can select this, press Shift key, hold it, and we can drag this between these nodes. And once it turn blue, it means it's ready to connect. So we can let go the left mouse key and boom, it's connected. And now we can play around with glow as well. We can lower the glow. I'm going to select my color corrector, and I'm going to also reset this and we can also add some hue like this. Let's add a contras, lower the gain a bit, and we can rack this right here and now check this out. Now if I play my clip, check this out. We have two videos playing at the same time. So that is why we use Do screen. We can compare them and we can select which one is the better version. Can also select this node, press one on the keyboard. You can also play around to see which one works better. We can select this one, press one on the keyboard. We can also increase the lift. We can lower the gain. We can also increase the Gamma, and now we can select this press one on the keyboard. Now we have the curve, so we can improve the curve. Finally, we have the glow, so we can press one on the keyboard, and we can also add this glow as well. Now we also have some options so you can select select this one and now have a look. We can also select the blend, so I'm going to select this one. And now if we go to the edit page, check this out. Now, we also have this option. If you click here, it will show the original clip. If you enable this, it shows the edited version of your clip. So this is how we can use the basic nodes in Fusion page. 59. How to Use Merge Node: Welcome back, everyone. Now I will show you how the node system work. We will compare it with the layer system. So now if we go to the Fusion page, as you can see, we only have two nodes. Now in the previous lecture, we use some basic nodes that don't need any additional nodes to work with them. But this time, we will use some nodes that needs additional nodes in order to work with. I'm going to drag this text node, and I'm going to drop it between these two node. Once the yellow line turn blue, it means it's ready to connect. And now we can let it go. It is connected. Now, as you can see, guys, this line is yellow. I mean this is the main input, and this is the main output. While this line is green, which means this media, this text is on top of the main clip. So let me show you. So I'm going to type a text. As you can see, we have this DaVinci text. We can simply click here and we can drag this right about here. Now this text is on top of the media. If we go to the edit page, I'm going to select my clip, press Alt, I'm going to drag this right here. So we have a duplicate clip. I'm going to select the title, drag my text plus on top of this vision composition. As you can see, this is the main track and this is the text track, which is on top of this clip. That is why we are seeing this text. If we drag this clip on top of the text, we can't really see the text. Unless we disable this track. Let's enable it again. So like this system in Fusion, if we go to the clip, I'm going to select my first clip, like the layer system. This is the main track, and this is the top track, which is on top of the main track. If we swap the input, let's click here to disable these inputs. And now this time, I'm going to drag the text connected with the yellow line. Now this is the main track. And if I select the media and connect it with the green line, now this clip is on top of the text. So green mean on top of the main track. Now we can simply drag this transform node and connect this in between these two nodes, I'm going to drag my clip right here so we can see the text. So as you can see, guys, we are seeing the text because the text node is behind our video. I'm going to drag my clip on top of it again. And if I drag my clip right about here, as you can see, guys, now we have this text because the text is behind this clip. So the merge node is used to connect multiple nodes. I'm going to disconnect all the nodes, select this one, delete. Now I'm going to connect this node with the yellow line. Now if you accidentally connect this with the green line, or you can connect this with the yellow line to avoid this problem, simply click here, drag the input, press old key, and let go. Now we have three options. Either you can set this as a background, which is a yellow line, or you can set this as a foreground, which is the green line. You can connect this media with effect max, but we can't really connect this because it's only work with a mask node. We can come back to mask node later. Don't worry about it. So I'm going to set my media as a background. I'm going to select this input. I'm going to press Aldkey, let it go. And now we can set this text as a foreground. Now check this out. We have the media as a background. We have the text as a foreground. Now in the merge node, we can also click here and we can change the composition mode of this merge node. Let me show you what I mean. I'm going to drag my clip right here. I'm going to delete this text. Go to the media. And I'm going to drag this logo, click here to disable the media so we can better view this image. I'm going to drag this and connect this with the green line. And now if I select the merge node, we can click her at this to screen. Check this out. We are changing the compositing mode of this logo because we are using the merge node. Merge node is used to connect multiple nodes. That is why it is applying these changes to this node. So consider this as this is on top of the main track and we are changing the composite mode of this one using the merge node. Check this out. We can also drag this anywhere. You can also select the merge node and you can increase or lower the size of this media, not this one because this is the main track, and this merge node is used to connect this media top of this main track. You can also lower the gain and the blend using the slider. You can change the angle, the size, you can play around with the center X and center Y as well. You can also invert the transform. So this is how node system works in fusion page. 60. Multi Merge Node: Welcome back, everyone. So like the merge node, we also have multi merge node, and it's very easy and simple to understand and to use. So to use the merge node, simply, you can hover your mouse on top of this node and you can drag and drop this node between your main nodes. Now if we select the multi merge node, check this out. We have this layer list. So currently, we don't have anything. So first of all, I'm going to drag my text node. I'm going to also select the media pool, and I'm going to also drag some icon so you can better understand how the multi merge node work. Let's disable this and now check this out. We have four inputs. First, I'm going to connect the text. I'm going to connect this one as well. Now we can select the multi merge node and check this out. We can select which input is going to be on top of all the inputs. So first of all, I'm going to select this one, which is a Gemini logo, and I'm going to track this on top of all the list. And now the Gemini logo is now on top of all the logos or all the nodes. Side this list. We can also customize the scale, the angle. We can change the compositing mode as well. We can change the blend mode and we can also change the gain et cetera. Now let's lower this and let's place. Next, I'm going to select this one, and I'm going to drag this in the second position and now check this out. Gemini logo is on top of all the logos. The V logo is on top of all these layers. Now I'm going to select my text node and first of all, go to the text, and I'm going to write DaVinci. Let's change the color to red or to something like a bright color so we can better view this and let's select the multi merge node, and I'm going to track this in the third position. So. This is the first one, the second, third, and at the last, we have this C dance logo. Let's select the text node, and we can change the color to red. There we go. Now in the merge node, we can play around with individual settings of these nodes. And if you select any node, it will also highlight the line of the nodes. If you select the text node, check this out. This line is highlighted, which means we have selected this node in the list of this multi merge node. Check this out. And also arrange the position. It doesn't matter. You can change. You can place any logo, anything inside this list. You can arrange any media, any nodes, whenever you want, wherever you want. And you can also individually change their blend mode. So for example, in the geminal logo, I'm going to select the geminal logo. We also have this transform control, so we can increase or we can lower the scale. We can also click here and we can rotate this logo. We can click here and we can place this logo anywhere. We can also use this arrow so we can vertically and horizontally place them. Now I'm going to change the blend mode to screen and check this out. We set the blend mode of this Gemini logo to screen. I'm going to select this logo, which is, and I'm going to change the blend mode of this to multiply and check this out. We can also select the text, and I'm going to change this to color bun and have a look. Last we have this logo, which is this one, and I'm going to click here and change this to Lighten. Now in the multi merge node, we can also individually disable or enable the inputs and check this box. As you can see, the gemini logo is gone. We can disable all the inputs. We can enable them as well. We can also reset individual nodes like this and you can also delete them as well if you want. Now, it doesn't matter how many inputs you have, you can connect them with a multi merge node. 61. Masking in Fusion: Welcome back, everyone. Now let's talk about mask node. And we have all the mask node right here, so I'm going to track them individually in the fission timeline, and this is how mask node work. As you can see, before the media, we have this blue arrow, and in the mask node, we also have this blue arrow. So we can connect this before the media. Now we can select any part of the picture or the video that we want to mask. We can change the view to dual view, select the rectangle mask, press one on the keyboard, so we can see the mask right here. We can also change the mask from here, and the best part is that you can disconnect the mask node. You can select the masking part of your clip that you want to mask, and then at the end, once you finalize your mask, you can connect the mask with your media and check this out. This is the rectangle mask. That is why we have this rectangle shape. You can also soften the edge if you want, you can also lower and increase the width of your border. You can also invert this mask. So now we are masking anything that is outside this rectangle. If you want to mask the inside the rectangle, you can click here, and now we are selecting inside rectangle. We are masking out the outside of this rectangle. You can also using this slider and you can change the width and the height of this rectangle as well. You can also change the corner so we have this corner. You can also change the angle as well, and now check this out. Now I'm going to disconnect the rectangle mask, and next, we have this ellipse. Select the ellipse, press one on the keyboard, and as you can see, we have the shape of the ellipse, so we can connect this with the media and now check this out. Now in the mask node, all the mask node share the same inspector, but they have one to three features which is different than each other. So this is how ellipse masks work. We can select this part, we can change the height. And as you can see, if I hover my mouse on top of this line, we have the height. If we hover the mouse onto this side, we can change the wide and if we hover the mouse onto this side, we are again changing the width. And if you hover the mouse on top of this, we are changing the height. You can select this and you can place anywhere you want. You can also like the rectangle to, you can invert it. You can change the water width, and you can soft the edge of this ellipse as well. Now let's disconnect this ellipse as well. And next we have this polygon mask. I'm going to press one on the keyboard. As you can see, we don't have anything. I'm going to connect this with the media, and now the media has gone. We have this blank screen. Now the polychorn mask is used if you want to customize your mask. So for example, I'm going to disconnect my mask, and I'm going to draw a random shape around this logo. Let's say you want to mask out this logo of DaVinci Resolve, and now we can connect this mask with the media. Check this out. We have this DaVinci Resolve logo. You want to customize these points, if you want to smooth out these points, all you need to do is just select this one, select all the points, and you can click here and you can smooth out these points. So now we have these individual points, so we can click here, select any point and check. We can smooth out these. You can even change the shape as well. So this is the polygon mass. I'm going to disconnect this, and I'm going to select the final shape of the mask node, which is the B spline shape. If we connect this to the media, check this out. We don't have anything like the polygon mask. So I'm going to select this one, press one on the keyboard, so we can view this in the first viewer, disconnect this. And now this time, I'm going to click here and I'm going to click here. Now I'm going to click here and check this out. We are drawing this shape. Let's click here. Let's click here. And now check this out. Uh, and now let's place this right here and let's place this right about here. Now I'm going to connect this with the media. And if I select the media out, check this out. We have this smooth shape. We can also soften some edges like this. We can also lower the border. Let's lower the soft edge to about 0%. We can also increase the size, check this out, press ContoZ to reset. We can also individually change the X rotation. We can change the Y rotation. We can change the Z rotation. So we have these interesting shapes, and we can animate them later if you want let's reset all these rotations. And now let's go to the edit page. Now, we are here in dit page, and as you can see, we only have devent resolve logo. So I'm going to place this on second track, and I'm going to place this image in the lower track. And now if I select this fusion clip, if I change the position, check this out. We masked out this fission logo from the image. And if we go back to the Fusion page, you can disable the mask from here as well. And if you go back, now we have this whole image. If you go back to the Fusion page, select your node, unable the mask now we have the mask out area only in the edit page. So this is how mask node work in Fusion page. 62. Multi Masking in Fusion: Welcome back, everyone. So now we have multi mask node in the Fusion page as well. So go to the Fusion page, and like the mask node, we have multi polynde. We can drag this right here. We can change this to do screen. Now, why we use the multi poly node? Well, if you don't want to use multiple nodes, so for example, if you want to cut out each frame, as you can see, we have nine frame in this picture. So if you want to cut out all these nine frame, you have to individually drag a rectangle mask node, and you have to cut out the frame. Way, you will have nine rectangle nodes. Well, instead of this, you can add a multi polynde and then inside this multi polynde, you can add as many masks as you want. So we have two mask. We have polygon and we have B spline. So I'm going to disconnect this. First of all, I'm going to select polygon mask. I'm going to also delete the mask. You can also reset, delete uncheck the mask as well. And you can also mess around with the setting of this mask as well. I'm going to first of all, draw my first frame like this. So now we cut out the first frame. If we connect this to the media, we have the first frame. So now I'm going to disconnect this so we can better see what we are cutting. Next, I'm going to add B spline mask, and I'm going to first of all, zoom in, crack this right here, and I'm going to cut out this frame with a multiple let's increase the water as well, soften the edge a little bit. And finally, I'm going to also add polygon mask for the third frame as well. So let's click here and we are done. I'm going to also soften the edge. And now if I connect this to the media, check this out. We cut all these three frame using one node. Now you can also select all these nodes, and you can at the same time, you can play around with the setting of each mask. You can also select the last one, press shift, hold it, select the first one. I will select all the mask or you can select the first one, press shift, hold it, and select the last one. It will also select all the mask. I'm going to select all my mask. I'm going to open their properties, and I'm going to lower the border of all these masks. So this is the first mask. So what I'm going to do, first of all, I'm going to click here, select the second one, drag this right here so we can see this is the first mask. This is the second, so I'm going to place this in the second number. This is the third one. I'm going to select my first mask, and I'm going to add a keyframe in border width. And let's go 20th frame, and I'm going to double click and type zero plus Enter. And now from here, select the second mask. I'm going to add a keyframe in border, and I'm going to change the value of the border width to zero. Let's also increase the edge. And now from here, I'm going to select my third mask, add a keyframe in the border width, and now I'm going to press zero and boom. And now I'm going to also go to this line, check all the polygon, click here, press control, hold it, and use the scroll, we can zoom in and zoom out. Select all the frame and click here to smooth out their animation. And now, if we preview this, check this out. So this way, you can create these kinds of videos or this kind of effect using the multi polynd. Now, we also have this example I use the same technique, but this time, I increase the add softness. 63. How to Use Background Node: Welcome back, everyone. So now we have this vision composition. Let's go to the vision page. And we also have a node called background node. Let me show you the use case of this background nodes. Very important. If you don't have any background, you can simply drag this node, connect this with the media out. And in this node, you have these types. You can select either solid color. In this, you can select any color that you want. Press Okay, and as you can see, we have this background. You can also change the horizontal, where you can change the second color from here. So as you can see, this is the second color, and I'm going to change my first color as well. Check this out. Or you have a vertical option. We have four corner option where we have four different corner and we can change the color of this corner individually as well. Now I'm going to select this color. And for this one, I'm going to also select the best part is that you can rack this node which is color corrector, and you can play around with the hue to see which color is looking good for your background. And you can also click here at a keyframe, rack this right here and go to the 100th frame, and you can increase the hue, then go to the pline, select this keyframe and smooth out their animation. And now check this out. We have this color changing background. Now I'm going to delete this. Now finally, we have this gradient and it's very useful because on the previous screen, you can visually change the gradient on your screen like this. You can also click here, and then you can change the color for this gradient as well. Click Okay. Click here, and now we can change the color of this gradient and now have a look. Now we can also click here in the color, and now we can also add a third color like this, and you can add as many color as you want. So now I'm going to add a little bit red color. Now we can also change the gradient type like from linear to reflect, check this out. We can change this to square, and now we have the square. We can change this to cross radial, and we can change this to angle and now have a look. Let's change this to linear. I'm going to track this right here and track this one right here. I'm going to also drag this color corrector note, change the hue, so we can see which color is looking beautiful. And I believe this one looked better. Let's select this, click here and I'm going to add a bright like this one. Now I'm going to increase my contrast and now check this out. We have this unique background. Now I'm going to drag a text note. I'm going to connect the text node to the end of this color corrector, click here and I'm going to type Denci I'm going to select bold Italic, or we can select light Italy. Let's go to the layout. I'm going to select the path, and I'm going to draw a path like this, and then I'm going to click here. I'm going to select all these points, and I'm going to smooth out the path. And now I'm going to also add a keyframe in the position and path. Let's click here, check the keyframe, and let's go forward like this, add a keyframe, go to the first frame, and we can lower it. Let's go to the spline, check the text, click here, zoom out, select all the points all the keyframe, and I'm going to smooth out the animation like this. And now, final, we can go to the text, apply a motion blur. We can also lower the shutter angle as well. Now go to the first frame and I'm going to drag my points right here because the text is going outside the frame. I'm going to select all my points, and I'm going to smooth out the path. And finally, I'm going to press Shift space, and I'm going to add a glow node between the text and the merge. I'm going to also increase the glow size and increase the glow a little. Now if we preview the clip, check this out. We can also select a single color. So I'm going to select this one. We can also go to this line and we can play around with a keyframe like this and now have a look. So this is how we can use the background node in Fusion page. 64. Keyframe Animation in Fusion: Hey. Welcome back, everyone. Now let's talk about keyframe animations in Fusion page. So first of all, I'm going to set up a background. So for that, we need a background node. I'm going to change the background type to gradient. I'm going to also change this to radial. I'm going to place this in the center. So the center position is 0.5. We also have 0.5, and now we have perfect center. We can also increase this. We can select this one, click here, and I'm going to select a gray color. Why we do that, I'm going to tell you in a moment. But first, we need a green node as well. So I'm going to press Shift space. Going to add a grid note. I'm going to also lower my major line spacing, and I'm going to change my color to a little bit black. Now we need a color corrector node, and now if I select my color, as you can see, we have this color. And this is the reason why I change my color to gray. We can also select a little bit dark color if you want to. We can drag this right about here. We can select the gradient, and we can also select a dark like this one. Now, this is going to be our background. I'm going to also select my gradient. I'm going to also select a dark color. Let's select one and now we are done. We can also select this, change the color to a little bit dark. Now we are done. Now we can increase the contrast. We can increase the gain a little bit, increase the lift, lower the gamma, and we can also set the brightness to this one. Now we have the background. Now for the foreground element, I'm going to track this pixel P and G shoe, which I generated using nano Banana two. I'm going to drag this line and connect this with the color corrector. So we have this merge. Let's drag this on the screen. I'm going to add a transform node, which is this one, lower my size to write about. Here. Now, as you can see, we have these diamond shapes. These represent keyframe. If you want to animate the position, you can add a keyframe in the center. And as soon as I add a keyframe, we have this orange keyframe. That means we add a keyframe in this position. Let's go few frame ahead, and I'm going to first of all, go to the first frame, and I'm going to place my shoe to this position. Now go to the 40th frame. Going to drag my shoe to this position. Now we can drag to this position. And now, finally, we can add 0.5, which is the perfect center value. Now, as you can see, we have this line. These line represent keyframes. These highlighted points represent keyframes. Now select your transform, go to the keyframe. And if you click here, as you can see, guys, we have keyframes. You can simply click here, and now we can clearly see the keyframes. Now we can individually, change the position of these keyframes or we can select all the keyframes and we can change the position of these keyframes as well. Now, if you want to smooth out the keyframe animation, simply go to this line, and in supline we automatically have the keyframe value. So for example, if you select your merge node, add a keyframe in size, increase the size, and if you go to the line, as you can see, the merge keyframe automatically appear supply and graph. So now I'm going to reset my merge, go to the keyframe, check this box, click here so we can clearly see all the keyframes. You can also drag this right here so you have all the options that we have right here. Now you can also zoom in position and zoom in position. We can select all the keyframes. If you want to change the position, if you want to increase the duration, simply click here, we have this box, and now we can simply drag this box anyway we want. Can also lower this box. So we have short amount of duration for this keyframe, and you can make them longer if you want to. Now, if you want to use all these option, you have to get out from this box by simply uncheck this box. Now you can select all the keyframes. You can even set these two set relative, and now we have this animation. We can uncheck this. You can even loop this as well, and now we have this loop animation. You can even set them to ping pong. And now, if I play my clip, we have this ping pong animation, and it will also run this in a loop. But if you want to simply run your keyframe to loop, you can simply check this one, and now we have this loop animation. We can uncheck this. You can even reverse your keyframe. Let's reverse this again. You can set them to step out. So now we have single keyframe without any animation. We can set them to step in. We also have this animation. We can even set them to linear, which is the by default graph for all keyframes. If you want to smooth out ease in or ease out your keyframes, you can simply check this box. And now if I play my clip, as you can see, guys, we have this keyframe. I'm going to select all these two, and I'm going to also increase the duration. I'm going to select these two, increase the duration a little bit. And now I have a look. We have this smooth animation. Now we can select all these keyframe, smooth out the animation, and we can also play around with the graph to see which one work best. Now if I play my clip, take this out. We can select these two, place them right here, select these two, and place them right here. Take this out. Now we can also go to the transform. We can go to the settings, unable motion blur, increase the quality to maybe four or five. We can even lower the shutter angle a little bit. Now, if you want to have an out animation, simply go to this line, uncheck this box, copy this keyframe, and you can paste this keyframe. Now we can select this keyframe and we can reverse them. And now if I play my clip, have a look. And after that, we have out animation. So now I'm going to select my keyframe. I'm going to click here and now have a look. We have the last frame right here. We can even add a camera shake. After the transform, we can lower the X and Y deviation. We can also lower the rotation, roughness over our strength and speed, and now check this out. We can also enable the motion blur in the camera as well. Now, at the end, I'm going to add a glow. We can disconnect this and connect this at the end, so we can add the glow to overall all the elements and now have a look. We have this keyframe animation. Now in the glow, we can also change individual value, so we can disable the green, and now we have this glow. So this is how we can work with keyframes infusion page. 65. Remove Green Background : Welcome back, everyone. Now I'm going to show you how we can use Chroma key infusion page. So I'm going to drag my clip in timeline. We can add a cut right here and we can add a cut right here. Now let's delete the audio and let's make a new fusion clip. Now go to the Fusion page. Once we are in here, we have to go select tool, select for key and select Delta key. You can also select Altra key. Now we can place this right here. First of all, we have to select the color of our chroma key. So I'm going to drag this color picker. I'm going to select a green color. For example, let's select this one. Now we can also tweak some color from here as you can see, to see which one work best for us. We can also disconnect this at a background to see. Let's delete this. And now, as you can see, we also have these fringes, so I'm going to select the ltr chy. We can also correct the background like this. Let's select the background color and change this to white so we can clearly see everything. Now as you can see, right here, we have some fringes, so I'm going to select my ultra key, place this right here. I'm going to this one and select this one. For this type of fringes, we can go to the mat and we can play around with the camera like this. Now, have a look. And now check this out. We have a clean. We can blur this out, and now we have a clean green screen cut out. Now we can also select this one, delete this, connect this to the media out. If we go to the edit page, as you can see, guys, we have this part, so to get rid of this, we can simply crop this and we are done. Now we can place any background behind this clip. Let's zoom in and have a look. We have a clean background. As you can see, guys, right here, we have some infringes. So to fix that, what you can do, you can zoom in, select the ultra key, and you can lower the gamma. You can also increase a little bit blur. And if we go back, check this out, we almost fix all the fringes in the clip. And now we have this clean background remove. So this is how we can use Chroma key infusion page. 66. Remove Grain and Noise: Welcome back, everyone. So now I'm going to show you how we can remove noise in Fusion page. So if I zoom in, have a look, we have this grain on top of the subject. So now let's select the clip, go to the Fusion page, and let's select remove noise. I'm going to add this node, connect this between these two nodes. And now we have two options. Either we can select Log, we have the softness and we have the detail. As you can see, if I uncheck this, this is after, and this is before, we can also increase the softness, enable this. We can increase the detail, increase the softness, and we can also increase all over the detail. And now have a look. This is before and this is after. Now we also have individual colors. So for example, if we log, we have softness and detail, if we uncheck, we have individual color. I'm going to zoom in. I'm going to also click here and I'm going to see the red color. We can see the green color. We can see the blue color. We can see the lp. So I'm going to select a red color. I'm going to increase the softness of the red, and I'm going to add a detail in red as. Now we can select green color. We can increase the green. We can also add detail in green as well. We can also go to the blue. We can increase blue. And now, if we change the color, check this out. We remove so much noise. So this is before and this is after. And now have a look. Now we have another option. We can go to the chroma. I'm going to reset all, go to the chroma. We can zoom in, increase the softness in luma, or we can increase the softness in chroma, and now have a look. We have this background softness. We can also add detail, and now I'm going to increase the ma detail in luma, as well, and now check this out. This is before, and this is after. We remove so much noise. So this is a simple method to remove noise from your video infusion page. 67. Tracking in Fusion: Welcome back, everyone. Now I'm going to show you how we can use tracker in Fusion page. So tracker is basically we can track something and we can attach object or text on top of our clip. Let's go to the Fusion page. But before we have to make a new Fusion clip. Now let's go to Fusion page and we can simply go to Select tool. We can search for Tracker. As you can see, we have these tracker, so we can only select the simple one Tracker, I'm going to add this between our nodes. Now this is how tracker work. I'm going to zoom in and I'm going to drag the tracker from this point. And as you can see, we have this magnified rectangle screen. We have to select the object or a tracking point that we want to track. So I'm going to track my camera flash. We can also select this rectangle. We can lower the size of this. We can even lower the size of this rectangle. Now, once you select your point, we have the option. Either you can track forward and then it will track backward. Or you can track forward, or you can even track the next frame. I'm going to select Track forward, and as you can see, if your tracker mess up, just simply stop your tracker from here. Click, and as you can see, to this point, the trackers. So what we can do, we can simply select the tracker. Rearrange the position, and then we can track forward. And once if the tracker mess again, we can simply go back, go to this position. I'm going to select my tracker. I'm going to select this point, go to the next frame, and we can see if the tracker is working fine or not. Now I'm going to track the next frame. Now we can track forward. And as you can see, in this position, my tracker miss my point. So I'm going to go to this frame, and I'm going to select my point again, go to the next frame next, next, and we are good. Let's select this point now the reason why we are having this mess is because we have a blood screen. I'm going to select this point next frame. You have this type of video where you have a blur object, you can simply manually select the next frame. You can track your object manually. But if you have a clear object, then you can track automatically. So in this case, we have a blur point. That is why I am tracking manually by selecting the next frame. Now, let's click Okay, and as you can see in this position, my tracker miss a point track forward. We are going to select this point, track forward, forward, and so the tracker missed the point again because I am rotating my mobile, so we have to manually select the next frame. Now, even if you select the next frame, it will also take some time to track your point. So you have to be patient. Now let's go to the next frame next, and I'm going to select point, go to the next next, the next point. Now we finally track the camera flash. Next, I'm going to attach the text next to the camera flash. So let's drag the text, drag this on the viewer. I'm going to type camera flash. I'm going to change my phone style to light Italic. Go to the shading. I'm going to also enable shading and we can lower the opacity. Now next, we can rack this on the viewer. I'm going to attach the text to the tracker. Now we don't see any text, so we have to select the tracker, go to the operation, and we can select match move. Now, as you can see, the text is now attached to the point. I'm going to select my text. I'm going to align the text right here, we can also rotate the text. Now you have to select your text, not the tracker in order to change the position of your text. And as you can see, guys, now we have this camera flash text track to Now, as you can see, if you see this type of jerk, don't worry, you can simply go to your tracker and you can zoom in. And as you can see, you can select this point. So we have to select one. So let's go to. Now we can track this point right here. And if you see any other jerk like this, we can drag this point and change the position right here. And as you can see, now we have this smooth tracking text. Let's change this position to write about. Here. And now if I play my clip, check this out. Now we don't have any chirk. Now we can also go to the tracker, go to these settings, and we can enable motion blur. And now when the text move, as you can see, we have this motion blur. We can increase the quality. We can lower this shutter angle as well and have a look. We can also add some effect to the text as well. So as you can see, I'm going to drag this glow. I'm going to increase the glow size. Let's add this glow. We can increase the glow size. We can also select individual glow. Let's just now have a look, guys. Now instead of this text, you can also, I'm going to disconnect these two place them right here. You can track your picture as well. So for example, if you have a picture, you can attach the picture. You can also add a transform node, and you can also rotate and place the picture. Now remember, you have to select transform and now have a look, we attach the picture. Can rotate this, can place this right here. Now, for example, if you accidentally go to the operation and you select the corner processing, as you can see, we have this error. If you select perspective position, we don't have any picture or text, and if you try to connect your text, let's say, let's go to the match move. As you can see, now the text is messing around like. So to fix this problem, you can simply go to the tracker. You can select your original tracker, which is the number one and accept the first one, you have to delete all the three others. And now if I play my clip, check this out. Now we fix the problem. We can simply go to the operations, go to none, go to the tracker, disconnect this, and now we have to reconnect this. Go to the operations, select match move, and now have a look. We fix the problem. The tracker, not only you can track your object and attach some text or picture on top of that, you can also add some visual effects. So as you can see, guys, if I disable my tracker, this is my video. As you can see, we have this video. If you want to focus on the person, if you want to make the person face in the center, you have to track the person I or any other point in the face of the person. Once you've done that, you can enable the tracker go to the operation and select match move. But this time in the merge, you can select background only. And if you do that, if we play the clip, as you can see, now the person phase is in the center. If we disable all the effects, if we disable a tracker, check this out. This is the original clip, and this is with the tracker. Check this out. The person phase is now in the center, and we have this awesome phase in the center effect. So this is how we can use the tracker infusion page. 68. Planar Tracking in Fusion: Welcome back, everyone. So in the previous lecture, we track a point. But what if you have multiple point? Well, for this type of work, we have a different tracker. First, convert your clip into a new fusion clip, go to the post frame and go to the Fusion. Now we have to search for planet tracker in Slack tool. We have to add this tracker. I'm going to connect this tracker. Once you connect your tracker, you can simply select the operation to track and you can set your reference time, which is 0.0. I'm going to also draw a rectangle. And once we draw rectangle, once we track the screen, we can simply go to track at the end. Now in the motion, we also have some type. If you are moving the camera in X Y position like this or this, you can select translation. If you also rotating the camera, you can select this. If you have a scale in and scale out motion in your camera in your video, you can se me, I have a perspective change. So I'm going to select the perspective. But if you want to select the translation, you can select that, and you have to also track, and you have to also track your clip from scratch. Now, as you can see, my tracking window is not changing at all because we have selected translation and rotation, not the scale in scale out or the perspective. If you select this one, set the track point and let's track to the start, check this out. We can simply reset this, go to the first frame, set my point, and now we can track forward to the end and now have a look now instead of perspective, you can also select that if you have a zoom in and zoom out position motion. But if you have a perspective changing in your clip, then I highly recommend select the perspective. So I'm going to select the perspective, go to the first frame, set the point, and I'm going to also track to the end. Now, as you can see, my window is also changing its size according to the laptop screen. Now, once you track your screen, you can simply change the operation to corner print, and we have to manually drag this point and we have to select the laptop screen. Once we've done that, we can simply drag any picture or video, attach the picture or video on top of that. We can go to the tracker and enable motion blur and now have a look. We track the laptop screen using the planet tracker. Now we can simply set the point right here and now have a track the laptop screen. If you want to color grade your picture, you can simply drag a color corrector. You can change the hue, you can change the saturation, et cetera. So I'm going to now I'm going to lower my gain. I'm going to also increase my Gamma a little bit. Now you have to change the gain and the Gamma only, but if you want to change the contrast, you can't really do. This out, and you can't even use the lip and the brightness and the contras as well. And now check this out. We have this result. Now we can also remove this. And if you want to place a clip, you can simply drag the clip, connect that, and now have a look. We have this clip. So this is how we can use the planet tracker infusion page. 69. How to Use Templates: Welcome back, everyone. So in Fusion page, we also have some pre made templates. Simply go to effects and go to templates and go to Fusion template. Right here, we have some particle templates. So for example, if you want blowing leaves, you can rack this template and you can connect that using the merge node, and you can select the merge node. You can increase the size. And as you can see, we have these premade particles. You can also select your particles. You can customize these particle as well. You can see, we can go to the region. We can select rectangular region and now have a look. We can also go to this style. We can lower the gain. We can also go to the color, and we can change the color of this template particle as well. Now I'm going to delete this. Now we also have these bouquet edges. I'm going to connect this with the merge, and I'm going to select this and we can change the color of the bouquet. So I'm going to select maybe this color and now have a look. Now we can also go to the particle shapes and we can also change the color of the particle. Here. Now let's delete this. We also have the bubble. We have firecracker. We have fireflies, have a look. We have the embers. They are very simple. You have to just use a merge node and connect them on top of your video. Now we have the fireworks and have a look. We have these fireworks. Now let's delete this. We have several particles. I'm going to connect this. We have this matrix effect. So I'm going to select the merge, increase the size. And check this out. We can also go to the matrix. We can lower the density, and we can increase the depth and now have a look. If you want to change the color, you can simply drag a color corrector node, and you can select any color that you want, or you can use the hue. So I'm going to reset this, and I'm going to use the hue and have read this. So these are the particle effects. We also have this smoke stack, so I'm going to connect this and now have a look. We have this smoke particle. We also have this snow particle. Check this out. We have this snow effect. Now the best part is that you can also customize this particle. We have this steam particle. Check this out. We have the steam, so we can select the merge, increase, and now we have the steam. Now we also have lens now the lens flare does not work with the merge, so you have to disconnect this merge node, delete the merge node, and you have to connect the lens player directly in between your main nodes. And now, as you can see guys, now we have this lens flare and you can animate the position of this lens flare. We have several lens flare in the templates, so I'm going to drag this lens layer and connect this between our nodes, and I'm going to place this right here. And let's go to the first frame, add a keyframe, place the lens player right here, and once the camera zoom in to the mic, I'm going to track this right here. Go to the spline. We can check the lens flare, we can zoom out. Now, if you go to this line in spline, don't check the lens flare. Simply check the path. Zoom out. You can select this keyframe and you can add a keyframe smooth animation and have a look. So I'm just going to select my keyframe, drag them, track this point and now have a now after the lens play, we have motion graphics. We also have some backgrounds. So as you can see, we have this wavy background. We can rack this and now have a look. We have this wavy background. Let's go to the playback. We can lower the quality and now have a look. We have this wavy background. We have the visualizer. I'm going to press one on the keyboard and two for the media out, check this out. Have different kinds of background as well. We also have the plasmatic heavel. Now, the best part is that you can add a merge node, connect the merge node, connect the background on top of your clip, and you can select the multiply, dissolve or screen, and you will have this background effect on top of your video. Check this out. Have this visual effects. Now, have a look. Let's delete this. We also have some look. We have shader, we have stylized text. So I'm going to drag a text. I'm going to connect this with the merge node. And as you can see, guys, if we change this to single screen, if I zoom in, have a look, we have this text effect. So these are the templates that you can use in vision page, and they are completely free. You don't have to use the studio version in order to use these templates. 70. Particles or Emitters in Fusion: Welcome back, everyone. Now let's talk about a meter node or particle node. We have this fission composition. I'm going to drag this. Let's go to the Fusion page. Now, right here, we have this Pemea node. I'm going to drag this right here. And if you try to connect this with the media out, you can't really do that because in order to connect this with the media out, we have to render the particle. So if I press one on the keyboard like this node, press one on the keyboard. As you can see, guys, we don't have anything. The previous screen because we have to render this particle. And once we render this particle, if you select the render, we can press one on the keyboard, and as you can see, now we have this three D space and we have this particle. We can select the mouse scroll anyway we want. We can move around in the viewer. We can press Control, Zoom out, and zoom in. And with the old key, hold it, we can rotate this as well. Now we can connect this with the media out. So I'm going to connect this with the media out. I'm going to change this to single screen, and as you can see if I select the piameter, we have this particle inside this region. So if you want to change the region, you can simply go to the region. You can select the rectangle, and now the particles are inside this rectangle. We can select A. We can select the cube. Cube is the same as rectangle, so I'm going to select the default, which is the sphere. We can go to the controls. We can increase the number of particles. We can lower the number of particles from here. We can even change the number of variation. So we have different variations in the particle. We can also increase the lifespan. As you can see, after some time, the particle is dying, so we can increase the lifespan by increasing the slider. Now next we have this velocity. As you can see, the particle is just inside the circle. They are not doing anything. So in order to move them, we can increase the velocity and we can change the angle. We can select, we can customize, we can decide which direction we want to move our particle. We can also change the velocity variance and have a look. We have some randomness in the particle. We can also inherit some variance, and we can increase the velocity variance. Check this out. We can also go to this style, and in style, as you can see, the style is set to point. We can zoom in. We can select blob. We can select either the gone. In here, we can select different kind of shapes. Here you can select any shape that you want. And finally, we have the point cluster. Have a look. We can zoom out. We can also go to the control. We can lower the velocity, so they move a little bit slower. Check this out. We can go to the P render. In P render, we can blur the particle and we can also lower the blend, so we will have this soft particle effect. I'm going to reset this. Now select the Pameter and go to the style. And in style, we can go to the color. We can even change the color of these particles. So I'm going to select this color. We can go to the color variance and in color variance, as you can see, we can decide two color that you want to keep and you will have both color. Have a look. So I'm just going to select this and place this right here. Now we are done. Have a now we can also go to the size. We can increase or we can lower the size, we have size variance. So you can play around with this slider to get the kind of disult that you want. Now here we have the fade control. So when the particle appear on the screen, they appear just like that. So we can add a little bit fade. So when they appear, we have a little bit fade effect, and if you want to disappear them with the fade, you can also drag this right here. And now, when the particle disappear, they will fade out like this. Now, these are some basic particle next, what we can do, we can go to the effects. We can go to the tools. And if you scroll down, you can select particles, and in particles, we have different kind of particle simulation. Like first, we have this P bounce, so we can drag this between a meter and the render, and now they will bounce just like that. Can go to the region, we can select the sphere, and now they will bounce inside the sphere. We can go to the control. We can lower the elasticity and now check this out. We can also increase the vardians. We can lower the spin, and we can also increase the surface motion. And now they will stuck like this. Let's lower this and we can also increase this. We can go to the region, and we can place the region like this, and now they will bounce outside this region. So with this, you can create different kinds of effect. Now I'm going to delete this, and next I'm going to select the P follow node, drag this and drop this between these two. And right now the particle is going crazy because we have to customize the slider in order to work with this particle. We can also go to the emeter and we can lower the velocity. And now they will move like this. Now I'm going to delete this node. Now we have another node called vortex, so I'm going to drag this and check this out. The particle will move in a vortex. So we have to lower the power. We can also go to the ameter. We can increase the velocity. If I play my clip, the particle is now moving in a vortex. We can decide what direction we want to move the particles. We can even increase the lifespan and now have a look. Now I'm going to delete this, and finally, I'm going to select this and now check this out. Now I'm going to go to the meter and I'm going to lower my velocity. We can go to the turbulence and I'm going to lower the strength of XYZ, so the particle will move like this. We can also lower the density and check this out. Now, next, I'm going to select the media pool, and I'm going to drag this picture. We can click here, press one on the keyboard. We have this picture. First of all, I'm going to add a flicker effect on top of this lamp. So what we can do, we can go to the effect, click here or we can select the shortcut key, which is just click here in the random empty space shift space. We have this select tool option. We can select flicker addition, and now we can add this. We can connect this with the flicker addition and now check this out. If I select this press one, we have this flicker. We can lower the speed. We can increase the range and now have a look. Let's increase the speed and let's increase the smoothness. And now I'm going to select the mask node. I'm going to connect the mask node on top of this flicker, and I'm going to select my lamp. We have this random shape. We can also increase the soft edge and now have a look. Let's go through the flicker. We can increase the speed, and we can go to the lift or we can go to the gain. So now check this out. Let's lower the speed. Now, have a look. Next, I'm going to disconnect this, and I'm going to connect the flicker with the media out, and I'm going to connect my P render with this flicker. And now we can select the ameterO we can select the merge. We can drag this right here. Let's change this to single screen and now have a look. We have these flies effect. We can also go to the P render and we can enable motion bler. We can lower the shutter angle. Now I'm going to uncheck the motion bler for now, and I'm going to add a glow node to the particle press shift, and we can connect this and now have a look. Now I'm going to also select the piameter, go to the style, and go to the color. We can customize the color. So I'm going to select a little bit dark color. Now as you can see, we have this effect. Now next, I'm going to press Shift space, and I'm going to search for an effect called drop shadow effect. Let's add this effect, and now I'm going to increase the strength, lower the blur, and now we can lower the distance, and now I'm going to increase the blur and I'm going to lower my shadow strength. So now have a look. We have this effect. Now, one final step, we can go to the shift space, go to the tools, and we can add camera shake, and we have to add the camera at the end. So this way, we can add the camera shake to all these nodes. So right now, the camera shake is going crazy. So to fix that, what we can do, we can lower the randomness, lower the speed, and lower overall strength. Let's lower this even more. Now we can also go to the edges, and as you can see, guys when the camera move have this transparent background. So if I increase my strength, you can clearly see we have this transparent background. So to fix this, we can go to the edges. We can select the wrap or we can select duplicate or we can select mirror. So the mirror works fine for me, so I'm going to lower my strength and now have a look. We can also increase motion blur, go to the P render, also enable motion blurr. And this is the final result. So this is how we can use the PA meters infusion page. 71. Adding Text 3D in Fusion: R. Welcome back, everyone. We have this normal text and we have the three D text. Now we are moving to three D space. So let's talk about the three D text node. Now I'm going to drag this, and if you try to connect this, we can't really connect this. Like the P render node, we have to render the three D, so we have this render three D. We can connect this with the render three D and then we can connect this to the media out. Right now we don't have anything because we don't have any text. So I'm going to type my text. And now if I select the render, press one on the keyboard as you can see we have this normal text. But if you select the three D text, press one on the keyboard, now we have the three D space, and to see the three D effect of this text, we can go to the text, go to the extrusion, and we can increase the depth. Now as you can see, we kind of see a little bit three D. We can also go to the bevel. You can also click here, and now you can see the final result. We can also increase the bevel, and if I increase the babel width, now check this out. Now we have this effect. Let's increase the bevel now, as you can see, without the light, we are seeing this with the artificial lights. So we have to add some lights into the scene. So what I'm going to do is I'm going to add a merge node, and we have to add three D merge node because we are working with a three D, that is why we need a three D merge node. We try to add the normal merge node, for example, we can search the merge node from here or we can select this node which is the merge node. And as you can see, we can't really connect this. But we can connect this after the render three D because the three D space is between this node, and we are outside the three D space. So we can delete this node for now. Now right here, we can either add lights or we can just change the color of the text. And as you can see, we can go to the render. We can enable lights, and once you enable the lights, now we can add some light. So for now, I'm going to add the spotlight, connect this with the merge node, and I'm going to select my light, which is this one. Select the merge node, press one on the keyboard, so we can see the three D space, select the light. We have selected the merge. That is why we are moving both. If you select individual node, we can now move individual node. As you can see, we are adding the spotlight to the scene. We can place this right here, go to the spotlight. We can even increase the drop off or lower the drop off. We can increase the cone and we can increase. We can even lower the intensity or we can go to the text. We can lower this one like. We can select the text. We can go to the transform. So now in transform, we set the transform to character, so we can individually move the character. So now the character will all move like this. If you select the word, we can move the whole word, not just character. We can move the whole word. So we can create something like this. Now we can also add some material on top of this logo. I'm going to first of all, press Shift space. We can add replace material three D. I'm going to connect this between these two nodes. And as you can see, now we have this white text. We can add a PNG. So if I select this, press one on the keyboard, we have this redsted material. I'm going to connect this with the replaced material now have a look. If I select this, press one on the keyboard, we have this material, so I'm going to select my three D text, go to the arrector. I'm going to change all these settings. Go to the word. We also have to change all the settings. We can place this right here, place we can select the light. We can even lower the intensity of the. Let's increase this, and now we can click here. We can lower the light. We can even change the direction, go to the transform, and we can change this like this. So we have this effect. Now I'm going to also select my light color, and I'm going to change the light color to something like this. Let's add a little yellow in this color. Now we are done. I'm going to press Okay. Now in text and shading, we can also use multiple colors. So as you can see, we use one material. That is why if I disconnect this node from here, select my three D text, we have a single color. But if I disconnect this or uncheck this, we also have this pop up with the bubble material, so we can select the Bbel material color from here. We can select any color from here. This is the text color, and behind this from here, we have the bubble color. We can go to the text. We can play around with the bevel, and now we have this text. Now let's go to the play material, enable this, have a look. Now I'm going to select my text three D, go to the transform, and I'm going to select character. I'm going to place my Y rotation from here and I'm going to select my z rotation to this position, and I'm going to also change my X rotation from here. Now we can add keyframes in all these values and go to the 16th frame. I'm going to change all to zero. And now have a look. We have this effect. We can also go to this line. We can enable this. We can click here. We can select all the keyframes, click here to smooth out their animation, and now have a look so this is how you can work with text three D infusion page. 72. Adding 3D Lights in Fusion: Yes. Welcome back, everyone. In the previous lecture, we add three D text. This time, we are going to learn what are the light. So now we have the text three D, we have the merge three D, we have the render three D, and finally, we have the media out. In order to work with light, you have to first of all, go to the render enable light and shadow. And right now, if you press Shift space and search for light, we have three light. We have the directional light, ambient light, and final, we have the spot light. So I'm going to add ambient light. I'm going to place this right here. We had directional light, and finally, we have the spot light. So what are the difference between these lights? Ambient light work on overall all the scene if you select and connect the ambient light with the merge. As you can see, it work with all the scene. It will add a constant color to all the three D. So if I select the ambient, as you can see, we can add a single color to all the three D material or the objects that we have in the scene. Directional light on the other hand is work like the name on it, directional light. So we can add light to any direction. Press Contosi, we have to select the directional light, and now we can place this light right here. You can also rotate this from the screen. You can click here. And as you can see, we can change the directional light in any XYZ rotation. So in order to see the directional light, we have to change the color of the directional light to maybe red. And if I click here, as you can see, now we are adding the directional light from this direction. So I'm going to select my text, go to the text, increase extrusion, so we can clearly see what we are doing. I'm going to click here. Now I'm going to add directional light here. We also have to lower the intensity of this ambient light. Now we can select the directional light and now have a look. So we are adding directional light behind our scene. I'm going to select my ambient and I'm going to change the color of this ambient. So let's select this color. Let's select the directional light, and we can also lower the intensity. Let's go to the text three D. We can go to the shading, go to the transform and we can rotate this so we can clearly see. So as you can see, if I rotate my text, the direction light is lighting the scene from this direction. Check this out. And you can even connect the spotlight. You can also duplicate these lights. For example, I'm going to press Control C, click a Control V, and now I'm going to connect this with the merge three D, and this time I'm going to select my directional light. I'm going to rotate to this direction, and I'm going to also slightly change the color let's rotate this so we will have the double color. And now I'm going to select my text three. I'm going to rotate this and now have a look. We have different kind of lights. Now I'm going to also select my spotlight because we haven't touched it yet, so I'm going to place this right here, increase this one, lower the intensity. We can also change the color of it. Let's add this color. We can increase the intensity. I'm going to place this right here. Zoom out. I'm going to select this one. I'm going to rotate spotlight, click here, I'm going to place right here. We are adding the spotlight. Now if I select my three D text, as you can see, we have this effect. Now in order to add a background, you can't really simply just add a normal background. You can add it. But if you really want to take the three D to the next level, you can delete the merge, delete this background, and we can add image plan three D, we can add the background, connect this to the image plan three D because we are working with a three D, that is why I am adding this. Now we can connect the image plane three D to the merge three D, and now we can select the image plane. We can go to transform, increase the size, and I'm going to also rotate like this. Now I'm going to select the background, and I'm going to also change the color of the background to maybe something like this one, click Okay, connect the render to the media. Now as you can see, if I select image plane three D, I'm going to increase the scale. As you can see, guys, if I select the spotlight, if I change the spotlight, it will also cast light on the background because we also change the background to three D by using image plane three D. As you can see, if I select the merge, go to the transform, if I rotate this, check this out. These are all the lights that we have added in the scene. We can press controls, go to the spotlight, and I'm going to also change the color of the spotlight to something like this. We can also select these two press Control C, click here, press Control, we can connect this to the merge three D as well. And this time, I'm going to rotate. So I'm going to select my image plan three D, press one on the keyboard, click here. We can rotate this as well, like this. I'm going to click here and I'm going to put this in the background. I'm going to select my spotlight and I'm going to rotate the spotlight. And as you can see, now we have this effect. Now let's select the text. We can also rotate the text. And as you can see, we are also casting light in the background. So if I select my spotlight, I'm going to change its direction. I'm going to click here. I'm going to lower my spotlight. I'm going to also place this right here. As you can see, now we are adding light. So I'm going to add a white light and now check this out. If I select this one, press one on the keyboard. If I click here, enable lights, as you can see, now we have this three D scene. If we add a three D camera and connect this with the merge node, and I'm going to press one on the keyboard. Don't worry. We will talk about the three camera later in the lectures. Right now, I'm just demonstrating you how the work. So as you can see, if I click here, rotate my camera, check this out. And if you want to animate the camera, you can simply go to the transform. You can animate the rotation of the camera and you will have something this. Let's delete the camera three D because right now you may be confused. What the hell is going on. We have so many nodes. Don't worry. If you repeat what I'm doing, if you mimic what I'm doing, then you will learn fast. If you just watching me doing anything, then sorry to say, but you can't really learn anything. So this is how lights work in fusion Bag. 73. Apply 3D Shaders in Fusion: Hey. Welcome back, everyone. So in previous lecture, we created this three D text and we use the lights and we use image plane three D. This time we are going to step up our game by using the shaders. So to use the shaders, you can simply go to effXs. You can go to templates. You can go to Fusion, and right here, we have shaders. As you can see, we have several shaders. To use Shader, you can simply just press Shift plus space and you can add this replace material three D. Once you add this, you can add this node after your text three D, I'm going to zoom in so you can better see can also travel in the timeline by using this little viewer from here. I'm going to drag this right here. And now I'm going to select, for example, I select the brick one, and now I'm going to connect this with the replaced material. And as soon as I connect this, as you can see, we have this effect. I'm going to change this to single screen and I'm going to zoom. As you can see, we have this brick three D text effect. We can select the text, go to re transform, and we can text. We have the brick effect. Now let's delete this shader, and I'm going to select this brush material shader. Connect this with the replaced material and have a look. You can also select your material and you can play around with the shader. Let's load this. So we will have a shiny surface. Check this out. Let's select the text and we can rotate the text. Let's delete this shader as well, and I'm going to select this carbon fiber. And as you can see in some shaders, we have several nodes. So don't worry, you can connect the last node, which is this one to the replace material. And once you've done that, as you can see, we have the shader. And to simplify these nodes, you can right click and you can make a group. Once you made a group node, you can simply double click on it, and as you can see, we can individually select any node that we want. We can also click here, and now we are here in the group. We can also right click and you can ungroup these nodes as well. Now, I'm going to select all these nodes, and let's press Delete key to delete all the nodes. Next and final, I'm going to make a golden text effect. So to do that, I'm going to drag this gold bump right here. I'm going to connect this with the replaced material. Now, as you can see, if I select my material, we have several nodes in it. This is a group of nodes. I'm going to press one, and as you can see, this is the material. This is the shader. We can double click on it, and what we can do, we can simply select all these nodes. Here to the blur, we can delete it. And as you can see, now we have this plain texture. Now we can select the shader and we can play around with the shader until we get a golden shader effect right here. You can also lower this. Now let's place this right here. Now, after that, what we can do, we can simply drag this color corrector node and we can connect this after the render three D and now if we change the color, as you can see, now we have this golden color. We can also go to the shader. We can play around with the shader, so we will get a glassy look. Now we are done. Now we can also select the text, and we can rotate the text. And now have a look. We have a golden text effect. You can also select your directional or any light. You can change the color of them to white. Let's select the color. We have the white color. Now we can select this and we can also increase the saturation. We can also play around with the contrast and the gain, and now have a look. If we go to the edit page, we can place any background behind this text. Let's zoom can have a golden text effect. Now if you enable the background, as you can see, we have this effect. So in order to work with the three D text of the golden color, avoid having a background. Now I'm going to set my spotlight right here. I'm going to place this right here. And now if I rotate this check this, we have the spotlight. I'm going to click here and I'm going to lower my spotlight. Now, if you want to use your text, instead of the background, you can disable your background. And if you go to the edit page, you can place any image or video behind your fusion composition and you can animate your text. So for example, let's go to the first frame, select the text. I'm going to add a keyframe in rotation, go few frame ahead. I'm going to rotate my text like this. And now let's go to this line, enable this. We can click here. Let's enable this, click here, zoom out like the keyframe, zoo out their animation. And if we go to the edit page, as you can see, we have this tax effect of golden color. So this is how we can use Shaded infusion page. 74. Fusion 3D Object Compositing: Welcome back, everyone. Now we are going to work with three D objects. We're going to learn texturing, mapping, et cetera. For three D Object, you can search for free three D model, FBX file. You have to download this. Now you can open any website. So I have opened this website. You can check the free you can select any category, and you have to also select Low Poly. The ow Poly file will work fine in disolve. Now you can download any three D file. For the background, I use VO 3.1 this is my prompt spot three D empty stage. This is the image that we got, and this is my prompt to animate this image with VO 3.1 light. So now we have the three D object. We also have the background. Now, once you have your files, you're going to extract them. So I'm rack this as well. So now this is my model. We can drag this FBX file into venture Resolve. So I'm just going to drag this and drop this right here. Now let's go back, go texture. Now in texture folder, we can select this and we're going to select this one. Now we can import this into vintusol once we have all the assets, we can simply drag a Fusion composition or we can select our background, which is this one. I'm going to drag this in timeline, and I'm going to create a new Fusion clip. Once we create a new Fusion clip, go to the Fusion page, and I'm just going to disconnect. First, I'm going to add my object. We can also drag this in the first viewer to see our object. Now we can rotate this as well. You can also click here to see the artificial lights. Now I'm just going to track a render three D, a merge three D, which is this and before I connect this with the three D, we have to texture this object. As you can see, the chair is flat. We don't have any texture on top of this chair. So for texturing, what we need, right click on the empty space, go to A tools, go to three D, go to material, and add this Blind. Once we add this plain node, we can also add this replace material three D as well. Now, once we have the replace material three D, we can connect this with our object, and I'm going to also connect this to my replaced material. Now, once we connect these two, I'm going to drag my texture file. I'm going to drag this, press old key, and let go, and we have these inputs. I'm going to select my tier texture, and I'm going to set this to diffusion color material. Now I'm going to select this, press one of the keyboard, as you can see, now we have the texture. Or you can also drag this and drop this in the first viewer. Now you have the cheer material. Now we are going to add a depth map. So to add the depth map or the bump map, what we can do, we can just simply search for bump map. I'm going to add this node. I'm going to select my bump map. I'm going to connect this with the bump map. So this is the bump map. I'm going to connect this, press key, let go. As you can see, we have this bump material. Once we connect this, let's track this right here. As you can see, we have a little bit tap. So I'm going to select my bump map if we change it. As you can see, now we have the texture detail. So let me just disable this. This is before and this is after. Now we can see this texture. Now we ddt this bump map as well. Now, once we set up all these things, we can finally connect this with Mg three. As you can see, this is the scene. Now I'm going to connect this to the media out. This is the background. I'm going to connect this with the media and as you can see, let's select this object or we can simply add a transform three D node. I'm going to connect this and I'm just going to rotate the chair like this, reset this. We can place the chair right here. We can also go to the vendor. We can enable lights, and now we can drop some lights in the scene, connect this with the Mg three D. And as you can see, we got this light. I'm going to increase the cone. Let's increase this angle as well, and I'm going to set this right here. Also rotate. I'm just going to go to the transform and we can rotate the spotlight like this. Click here, place this right here. Now I'm going to duplicate my spotlight, connect this with the Mg three D. I'm going to set this right here, go to the transform, rotate the light, click here, place this right here. Now we can rotate the scene. We can place the light here. And as you can see, now we are seeing this light. Now I'm going to select control. I'm going to lower my intensity. Also, I'm going to change the light color, select this, and I'm going to select this like this light and go to the Control, click here, like the color picker. I'm going to select this light. Now as you can see, kind of matching the light of the scene, I'm going to also add a directional light, and I'm going to connect this with a Mg three D, and I'm going to also rotate the light. So go to the transform and I'm going to rotate like this. Click here, place this right here. Now let's call it transform and we can play around with So This is light that I'm looking for. I'm going to also click here, select the color picker, select this slide. Now we are done. Now we can finally select the transform. And as you can see, we can rotate this. And now we have this beautiful scene. Now I'm going to add a keyframe in Y, go to the end frame, and I'm going to rotate my chair a couple of times like this. We are going to add another transform, three D. And let's select these nodes, select right here. And I'm going to also zoom in, add a keyframe, go to the end frame, add a keyframe in Z translation, and we can also place right here. Now go to this spline, check these two transform three D node. Click here. Zoom out, select all the keyframe and smooth out the animation. And as you can see, if we preview, we have this awesome three D object rotating now you can place your light anywhere that you want. Like we can also copy this spot light, place this right here. We can connect this with merge three D, and for this node, we can click here and we can rotate this like this and we can place this behind the chair. Let's click here here. We can also lower this angle, lower the cone, and now have a look. We can also lower the intensity like this. Now we can also add a ambient light over the scene, connect this Murder three D out. We can also click here, we can change the color. So as you can see, we can select any color that we want. We can select this one, press Okay, and now have a look. Now we kind of see the t. So this is before and this is after we added the ambient light. Once you have your scene, what you can do after the render three D, you can add this color corrector node, and you kind of match the scene with your background. So as you can see, I am matching color of my background with my chair. So we can also correct this. Rosie we can lower the gain, we can lower or increase the camera. So now we have to match the shadow of the footage plus the shadow of this chair. So I'm going to lower this to shadow with the now, once you add the color corrector node, we have this scene, and we can also add a color to the scene. So I'm going to add this color. Now, this color is matching the scene perfectly. Now, at the end, after the merge and after all the nodes, what we can do, we can add a color corrector again. We can change this to single screen. Let's disable the media pool, and we can add color, and we can color grade this video as well. As you can see, we also have this heel logo at the end. So now we can also add this color corrector node right here and we can lower the gain, lower the lift and lower the gamma as well and increase the contrast a little bit, lower the brightness. And once you have this, what you can do, you can add ellipse mask and connect this to the color corrector. Invert this, also soften the edge, and we can also increase the math. Let's select this and we can also crease the gain, lower the Gamma until you get this one can also like this and now have now to improve the result, even more, you can go to the settings of this render three D node, and you can enable motion blur. Now, one more thing you have to keep in mind, if you enable the motion blur, it will also take longer to render your clip. So this is without the motion blur. It took me 26 second to render this clip, and with the motion blur, it took me 2 minutes and 47 seconds, almost 3 minutes. So as you can see, this is a huge difference between the motion blur and without the motion blur. Um, 75. Color Page: Introduction: Welcome back, everyone. Now let's move on to the next page, and it is the most important page as well to resolve the color page. We can click here to go to the color page, and we have some few things in color page. First, we have effects. You can search for any effects you want. You can simply drag this and drop this right here after your note. And as you can see, we can apply effect. Now you can also delete this effect from here or you can select your node, and you can press delete. As you can see, we don't have any effects, but we still have the node. So you can add any effects that you want. So I'm going to add directional blur on top of this node. Now we have directional blur inside this node. We can customize the sliders according to the need, and we can delete the effect. Or if you want to delete the node completely, you can simply select your node and you can press the lead key. Also directly direct an effect and drop that onto your main node, and you can customize the effect as well. But you can add only one effect on each node. So for example, if you want to add the gaussian blur, you can't really drop that on top of another effect. It will delete the previous effect and it will update it the new effect, which is the gaussian blur. So if you want to add directional blur as well, you have to simply drag this after your node. Once we have the yellow line, it's mean it's ready to connect. We can let it go. And as you can see, we can add multiple effects just like this. Let's delete this node, and let's delete this effect as well. Now, after the effects, we have the node, we can switch on and off. From here. If you want to visit your node timeline, you can drag this timeline anywhere you want by using your mouse scroll. You can also press Old key, hold it, and you can zoom in and zoom out using your mouse scroll. If you want to add another node, you can simply click here to add node, but it will edit this as a layer node. We will get to that later in the lecture. For now, I'm just going to delete these nodes. And if you want to add another node after your main node, you can simply click here. As you can see, it will add these nodes. Let's delete these nodes, and we also have this which work fine just like this one. This is a layer and this is the parallel. I will get to them later in the lecture. Don't worry about it. You can also click here and you can use this to travel just like we use the Musroll you can click here to select selection tool. Now onto this preview Window side, we have timeline. So as you can see, currently, we only have one timeline. So let's go back to Edit page. Let's click here and we can display stack timeline. Now from here, we can add multiple timeline. Let's track this image right here. Go to the color page, and as you can see, now we are here in timeline number two. If you want to go back to timeline number one, simply click here and select Timeline number one. Now, right here, we have the clip. So as you can see, currently, we only have one clip. If we drag all these clips in timeline and go back to color page, as you can see, we have multiple clips. So the color page also work on not just like Fusion page, and you can individually color grade and color correct your images or pictures or video. Also have the media poll so you can directly drag an image and drop that right here. Let's delete this. We also have some lds and we have calorie. I will also get back to this later in the lecture. Don't worry about it. Now, this is the main tool that we are going to use in color page because the majority of time that you're going to spend in color page is on these tools. The wheels we have color wheels, we have color bars, and we have log wheels. We also have these additional tools that we will cover in later lectures. We have this curve as you can see, we have the simple argv curve. We also have multiple curve like Hue versus saturation, Hue versus U and et cetera. We also have this color slice tool. We have color warper, qualifier, we have matching window as well, and we have some other tools. Now, this is the scope that you are going to look all the time in color page to color correct and color grading, pictures, videos, and footage. So this is the basic introduction of color page. 76. How to Use Color Nodes: Welcome back, everyone. So we are going to be working on nodes. So let's learn about nodes. How can we work them in color page? First, if you make some changes in your node, so I'm just randomly changing these, if you want to reset everything in your node, first, you can click here to reset. But as you can see, you have to reset each tool. So how can we reset everything? Simply right click on your node and select Reset node grid. It will reset everything. No matter if you have effects inside this node, it will reset everything that is inside this node. Now, second, we have node label. This is how it works. I'm going to right click. I'm going to add a serial. If you want to add a node after your first node, we called it serial. After your second, if you want to add another node, we can add another serial. Now we have three nodes, and we have the number on them as well. Going to select my first node, and I'm going to change my Gamma. In second, I'm going to change the gain. In third, I'm going to change my offset. Now, how can we tell the difference which one is gain, which one is Gamma, and which one is offset? Simply, you can right click, go to node label, and you can type the label on them. So this is the gain, and this is the gamma. So as you can clearly see, we can tell the difference by looking at them. If you want to reset all these nodes, if you select all the node, you right click and you reset the node, it will only reset the first node, not every single node. So how can we reset everything and go back to the first node? Right click in the empty space and select reset all grades and nodes. But if you do that, it will delete every node, and you will have the default node, which is this one. Now, next, we have node color. So you can color your node. So as you can see, we have this line in orange, I'm going to add some cereal you don't have to right click and go to the add node. You can simply click here. It will add CL and you can add as many sal as you want. Now the first node is in orange color, so we can right click and change the color of this node to yellow. And for this, I'm going to select this one. So you can easily tell the difference between the nodes. By using the label and by using the color, you can easily tell the difference between your nodes. Let's reset all nodes. Now, next we have Lok node. So how Look node works. For example, if you don't want to disturb this node, if you have, for example, change the offset in this node, and you don't want to disturb it by accidentally clicking, selecting the node and change something inside it. Well, we have to add another node for this example, and I'm going to place this right by the way, you can place your node anywhere you want. You can also disconnect your node and you can also reconnect it like this. And we have the spinal line which represent the output. Like the fusion page, if you disconnect this, if you make some changes, for example, as you can see, if we go back to Edit page, we don't have anything. But if you connect this to the output, now we have some let me just reset this. By the way, I'm just going to delete this because we need only two nodes. Now as you can see, we change the offset in this node. So if you don't want to disturb this node, we can simply lock this node and we can make some changes in the second node. Now, as you can see, we lock this node. So no matter you change anything inside this node, it won't affect it anymore because we lock this node. If you want to make some changes in your clip, you have to select another node which is not locked. By the way, we can also tell which is the lock and which is not locked because we have this lock icon up here. On this node. We can simply right click unlock this node as well. Now, by the way, for example, if we lock this node and if we change the curve in this node, if we unlock this, it will also reset the value that you change while this node was locked. Let's reset all the nodes. Now, next, we have add node, and we have SRL node. We learn about the SIL, so what is SIL before? Well, it is the SDL node, but it will add the node before your first node. So I'm going to just track this right so you can better understand. If you want to add a node before this node, you can simply right click. You can hover your mouse onto add node, and you can select Add SDL before. By the way, we also have the shortcut keys appear on the right side. I'm going to select Add serial before, and as you can see, now we have this node before the second node. Next, we have add parallel. So this is how it's work. We have parallel. If we add this, as you can see, we have two nodes. If I reset this and if I add layer, as you can see, these are pretty much the same. Well, they look same, but they have different features. So let me show you. First of all, I'm going to right click, go to the ad, and I'm going to select Add layer. Now this is how layer work in color page. This we have to go back to the dit page. Now in AdditPage this is the track number one. If I want to add something on top of this track, we have to add this on top of the track simply, right? So this is the top track, and this is the bottom track. The top track is now displayed on screen because it is on the top, obviously. But in the color page, it works differently. So I have to go back to my first clip. In color page, this is the top track, and this is the bottom track. So let me show you. For example, if we select this node and if we change the offset you can see on this small preview node screen, we can clearly see that the offset is changing, but it is not effecting on the preview screen. Let's reset this. But as soon as we select the second node, and now if we change the offset, now the reason we don't see any preview is because we place this clip, this picture on top of the main track. So I'm just going to select this and track this right here so we can clearly see now let me reset this, and if we make some changes, as you can see, nothing is happening because this is the bottom track, and this is the top track. So I'm going to select this one, and now if we change the offset, as you can clearly see, now we have something on screen. So this is the top layer and this is the bottom layer. So this is how layer nodes work in color page. Now I'm going to reset all the nodes, and I'm going to add parallel node. Parallel node work differently than the layer node because in layer, you can see we have a bottom layer and we have the top layer, but the parallel node works together. So let me explain. For example, I'm going to select my first node, and I'm going to change the offset in this node. Now if we select the second node, and if I change my gain, as you can see, we are mixing these two node and we are creating a color. So these two work together. If you want to make some changes, you can work on them. These node shared the same features. Let's say you want to change the gain in this node, you can also change that. And if you want to complement this color, you can select the second node, and you can create a color. You can color grade by combining these two nodes. So let's reset nodes. And now, if we go to the add node, we have final add outside. So what is outside? Now for this, we need to go to the masking window. In masking window, I'm going to select this and I'm going to mask this. Now, as you can see, we don't see any mask because we have to click here in order to see the mask. So we are selecting this part and we are masking out everything which is outside this circle. Now we also have this value, but don't worry, we will get to the masking window later in the lectures. Now, let's say you want to add the invert mask, but you also need this mask. For this, we can simply right click and go to the add node select at outside. Now as you can see, in this node, we are selecting inside circle. In this node we are selecting, which is outside the circle. Now, by the way, if you make some changes, it will also update the mask of this node as well. So let me show you. I'm going to click here and I'm going to go to the curve and I'm going to increase the curve like this. Now in this node, I'm going to lower my as you can see, we are creating this type of effect. I'm going to select my first node, go to the masking window, and I'm going to soften the mask a little. Also, I'm going to lower the curve and check this out. Now, if you disable the node, by the way, you can simply press Control D to disable node. Will also disable the second result because we outside the first node mask, that is why if we disable it, it will also disable the second node. If we enable it by clicking same Control D, again, it will enable and disable the node by pressing Control D. Now let's reset all grades. Now next we have share node. For example, I'm going to add some few pictures in the timeline so we can better understand what is the share node. And for example, you want to add the same effect on top of every clip that you have in the timeline. For this, we can simply save this as shear node. We can control C, and we have to select all the clip, press Control V. So now they all have the same node. Now the node is also locked. So we can unlock the node, and as you can see, we also unlocked every single node in this clip. Now if you make some changes in the first node, it will also effect in every single clip. Check this. If you change the curve, it will also effect other clips as well. So this is the benefit of using the shear node. If you want to make the same changes in every single clip in your timeline that you have, you can simply copy and paste the shear node in them, and then you can make some changes. Let's reset all the nodes. Now to reset every single node in this clip, we have to select the first clip rest shift, select the last one. I will select all the clip. Now we can right click and we can reset all the nodes. And as you can see, now we don't have any additional node except the default node. And finally, we have delete node. You can simply press Shift space to delete the node or you can simply press Delete key to delete the node. If you want to add, again, the default node, simply click here, it will add the serial, and now we have the default node. Now you can also lock your node from and you can also delete your node from here. Now we can add the node again, and from here, you can change your view from grid to list. And if you want to add another node, as you can see, now we have the layout view. We can also add a layer, and as you can see, guys, this is the layer, and this is the node. So if we change something in here, as you can see, we can't really see anything. So we have to select this and we have to change something. Now let's go back to graph view, and we can right click and reset everything. 77. How to Use Color + log + HDR Wheels: Welcome back, everyone. So the most important tools in color page is color wheels, color bars, and log wheels. These are the most important tools that you are going to be using in all of your projects. Now, first, we have color wheels and we have offset. So before I change any color of the offset, let me explain what is offset. I want you to look closely at these scopes. I'm going to increase my offset by clicking here, dragging this wheel to the right side. Now, as soon as I'm doing this, as you can see, guys, the color is going upward. And if I drag this wheel to the left side, we are dragging the color down. And we are dragging all the color, pushing them downwards. This is offset. Now, on the other hand, if we take the gain and if we increase the gain, as you can see, guys, only this part, only these highlights is going up, not the whole scope. And if I drag this to the left side, if I lower my gain, as you can see, it is pushing the highlights downward. So this is the gain. I will effect your highlight. Let me reset this by clicking here. Next, we have the Gamma. If I increase my gamma, as you can see, this portion, the middle portion is going upward, and if I lower this, it is going downward like this. Now next we have lift. If I increase my lift, it is pushing this part. It is pushing this portion, the shadow portion of my video upward. And if I drag this to the left side, it is pushing them downward. Now, similar to the lift, if we go to the log wheels, we have the shadow, and similar to Gamma, we have midtone and similar to again, we have the highlight and the offset is the same. So what is the difference between these three and these three? Well, if we look closely, if I increase my shadow, only the shadow part of my video is effecting right now. On the other hand, if we go to the lift, if I increase my lift, as you can see, it is pushing a lot of this part upward or downward. So we are adding lights or we are lower the lights in the video by using the lift like this. But if you use the shadow, look closely at the scope, we are only effecting the shadow part not the whole graph. This out. And similarly to this logic, if we increase the mid tone, it is only effecting the mid tone, not the whole portion of the mid tone of our scope. On the other hand, if we go to the Gamma, look closely at the scope. If I increase my Gamma, check this out. It is pushing all the colors in the middle part in the middle tone upward or downward. Let's reset and go to the log and now look closely at the scope. And similar to this, we have the highlight. Only the highlight of my video is affecting by increasing or lowering the highlight. On the other hand, if we go to the gain, it is pushing all the colors up or all the colors down, not just the highlight. So this is the main difference between the color wheels and log wheels. Now we have color bars. What are these? Well, these are the same lift Gamma gain and offset except what you can do if I lower my almix and increase my almiic, nothing is happening. But let me explain to you if I increase my blue color, as you can see, all the colors in my shot is also affecting by the blue color. But if we lower the al mix, and now check this out, if I increase my blue color, only the blue colored is effecting right now, not the whole scope. So this way, you can use your color wheels. Let me reset now we use the Al mix. Now let's take a look at other features like we have the mid and detail. So if we increase this, we have the detail in the shot. Let me just zoom in and zoom out by using the scroll. As you can see, this is the sharpened version and this is the softened version. We have the pivt Now if you increase all over the pivt nothing happened because the pivt is connected with the contrast. So let me increase my contrast a little bit, and now we can control the contrast by using the pivot. Check this out. Have the tint and we have the temperature. Now the temperature, if we take this to the left side, it will add a cool color. If we take this to the right side, it will add a warm color. And we have the tint. If you take this to the left side, it will add a green color, and if you take this to the right side, it will add this merchantalor. We have the color boost and we have the saturation. So if you increase the color boost, and I'm going to add another note, and I'm going to also name this saturation. Now in this node, I increase my color boost to 100%. In this node, I'm going to increase my saturation to 100%. Now I'm going to select my first node, and I'm going to press Control D to disable this. Now check this out with 100% saturation. We are increasing all the color. If I disable this and enable the color boost, as you can see the color boost, increasing all the colors and pushing them to their limits. And we also have some glitches right here. So the color boost is like the saturation, but with a boost, you can increase your color across the limit. So as you can see, this is the color boost version, and this is 100% saturation version. Let's reset all this. Now in this feature final, we have the highlight and you can also lower your highlight. Check this out. We also have these tools. So if I click here and if I zoom in, so this is a white color in my shirt. So I'm going to click here, and as you can see, it balanced my short. It balanced the color. So as you can see, it add a little bit cool color, and it also added a tint color in my shirt. Now to explain the white balance for you, I have another video which I have created using Google Gemini Omni. I'm going to click here. This is my white shirt, so I'm going to click here and check this out. This is before and this is after. If you look at the background, this is before and this is after. It is cleaning the shot, and now we have the perfect white balance. So before we have a blue color right here, this is before, and this is after. Clearly explain to you, I'm going to so I'm going to click here and I'm going to add a blue color so you can clearly see that we have a blue color in the background, and I'm going to add a node. And this time, I'm going to click here and select my white color and now check this out. Now we have the huge difference. So this is before, and this is after. So this way, you can white balance your shot. You can also go back to your previous clip by clicking here. And if you have another clip, you can click onto again. And as you can see, if you click on it again, we don't have any clip before this picture, so that is why we have only this picture. If you go forward, you can click here again and again. Now right here, we also have this auto balance. If you click on it, let me reset, and if you click on it, it will take some time, and it will automatically balance your shot. And now, as you can see, this is before and this is after. So we automatically balance the shot, and before we have a little bit blue color. But now, as you can see, we have the pure now next we have some additional wheel, which we call HDR wheels. And if we go to the end, we have six wheels. Let's go to the first wheel and we have the black wheel. So I'm going to select my picture, which is this one. So let's color grade this by using the HDR. So I'm going to reset all and first, we have the black. So if you want to see what is going to be effecting after you increase lower or add some color in black, you can simply click here. Will shows you a mask. Now as you can see, it show me which are going to be effect if I increase or lower the black. And same to this logic, we have the dark. So if I zoom in, check this out. We are adding the color in the dark part of my clip. Let's reset this. Not only you can add color to the dark portion of your clip, you can also expose it by clicking here and dragging this to the right side. Check this out. If you want to lower this, you can drag this to the left side. And also lower the saturation of the dark portion and we can increase the saturation of the dark portion of our clip. Now, let's reset this. Now, as you can see, we have the shadows of this video, and we also have the shadows highlighted in the scope as well. So I'm going to increase my shadow like this and we can lower the shadow we can also increase the saturation or we can lower the saturation just like this. We can also add a color if you want to. I'm going to add a blue color. Now you have to be patient while you use the ATDR because they will take some time. You can also go to the playback and you can also go to the timeline playback resolution and you can change this to quarter. Let's reset this. Now next, we have the light and we have the highlight. Well, if you look closely, the light will affect all the lights in your shot. The highlight will affect all the highlights in your shot. If you look closely to the scope, this is the highlight, and this is the light. So we can change the color in light and you will get this result. And if you change the color in highlight, you will get this change, which is also very interesting because you can add some color to your shot just like this. Let's reset. Now we have the specular. Don't worry. You're not going to be using this specular, so I'm not going to explain this because I really don't know what to do with the specular. I haven't touched it yet. Now, finally, we have the global. So as you can see, the global will affect overall your clip. And you can also complement this color by tweaking the highlight as well. As you can see, you will get something like this. Now we can go back to the gain and we can increase the gain, and now we will have this color grade version. So this is before and this is after. As you can see, we improve the video a lot. So this is before and this is after. This is how you can use these wheels in color page. 78. Learn RGB Curve: Hey. Welcome back, everyone. So first of all, we have this short ad, which I have created using Google Gemini Omni, the latest version of Google, and we are going to learn about curves on this video. So first of all, in curves, we have the RGB curve, which means red, green, and blue, and we also have the white, which is the luminance. Now this is the highlight, and this is the shadow. So if you take this point and bring this up, you can see we are increasing the highlight. If we take this down, we are adding dark to the shadow ba. Going to reset this, and you can also add points on this curve, we can add multiple points, and we can manipulate this curve like this. We can bring this up and we can bring this up, or we can bring this down as well. Now I'm going to reset this. Now, as you can see, if you select your curve, we also have this picker, which is a qualifier picker. You can see the logo is the same. Can click here and we can select a point on the highlight. And in the shadow, we have the shadow right, so I'm going to add a point in the shadow. Now we can manipulate the highlight and right here, we can manipulate the shadow. So as you can see, we are adding depth to the shot. So if I press Control D to disable, this is before and this is after. You can see we have a huge difference just by tweaking two points here and there. Now let's reset this, and let's go to the red color. And in red color, as you can see, if we take this up, it will add a red color in the shot, and if we push this down, it will add a green color, just like the tint. If we go to the green, if we take this up, it will add a green, and if we bring this down, it will add a magenta color. And finally, we have the blue just like the temperature. If you bring this up, it will add a blue color in the highlight and in the shadow as well. But if you bring this down, it will add a yellow color, the warm color in the shadow or in the highlight as well. If you want to reset this, you can simply click here to reset, and now if you click here onto this link, it will now bring all the colors back in the line. Now in the curve next, we also have low high, and I'm going to first of all, add a point right here and add a point right here. So as you can see, we are manipulating the highlight, and right here, we are manipulating the shadows. So look closely at the scope. We are effecting the shadow. And right here we are manipulating the highlight. So if I disable this, this is before and this is after. Now we also have Hue versus Hue, so this is how it works. So we have the next ad which I have also created using Gemini Omni. Now if I take this point and bring this up, we are changing the hue just like this hue. So I did not discuss this in the previous lecture. So we can change we can swap the color by tweaking the hue here and there. Just like this hue, we can reset this. We can tweak the color here and there. But we also have some other options. Like, as you can see, my skin color is a little bit yellow, so we can select the yellow, and we can bring the yellow down or bring the yellow up to change my skin color. And just like this, we can select this color, which is the color of my can and we can change the color of the can and the background. If the background is the same color, we can change that as well, and now have a look. This is before and this is after. So we change the entire color of the ad by taking one color now let's reset this. Now I'm going to show you another interesting thing. I'm going to select versus, and I'm going to select this color. So as you can see it at a point of this color in the graph, we can manipulate the color and check this out. By using this slider, we can manipulate the color. We can also select this color, which is this one, and we can also manipulate this as well. You can select multiple color, but in this video, we only have one or two color. So I'm going to reset this, and now let's go back to the person, and I'm going to select my skin color, which is this one, and I'm going to select my can color, which is this one. Let's select multiple colors so we have more options. And now I'm going to tweak this color by using this hue rotation. Now check this out. We are increasing the color. We are swapping the color, but the skin color remain the same. You can also do this. You can increase the color up or you can bring this down. Once you have your color, you can select this one and you can bring this up. Now check this out. We are restoring the skin tone. So this is before and this is after. This way, you can add interesting color. You can color grade your video. I'm going to reset this and let's go to the hue versus saturation. So in the hue versus saturation, what it does, if I select the red color and if I increase it, as you can see, it is increasing the saturation of the red color. And if I select this color, for example, if I increase the saturation, check this out, it is increasing the saturation of this color. If I bring this down, decreasing the saturation of this color. Let me go back to previous ad, and in this ad, I'm going to select this color and I'm going to select multiple color, so we have more options. And now if I bring this up, it is increasing the saturation of this color. Bring this down, it is now lowering the saturation of this color. Let's reset this. Now next we have hue versus luminous. Now, what it does like the saturation, it will effect your shadow and highlight. So I'm going to select the red color, and if I increase it, it will add light to this color. If we lower this, it will add a shadow to this color. Reset this, go back to the next ad, and now I'm going to select this color. If we bring this up, it will add light to the highlight. And if we bring this down, it will add shadow to the highlight. Next, we have luma versus saturation, and we have saturation versus saturation. Well, if you bring this I'm going to add another node. So this is luma versus saturation, and this is saturation versus saturation. So in the saturation versus saturation, I'm going to increase the saturation of the shadow. Now look closely. This is the luma versus saturation. As you can see, we have low color in the luma versus saturation, if I enable this, we have the saturation. If I disable this and go to the saturation versus saturation, as you can see, we have less saturation than the luma versus saturation. So we have a little bit different but not too much. Let's reset this. Now finally, we have saturation versus luma. To explain this, we have this frame of my clip. I'm going to bring this up. It will add highlights to the highlights, and if we bring this down, it will add shadow to the highlight. Similar to this, we have this. If you bring this up, it will add light to the shadow, and if you bring this down, it will make your shadow darker. So this is how we can use curves in color page. 79. Balance Skin Tones With ColorSlice: Welcome back, everyone. Now, if you don't want to use the hue, you can also go to the color slice, this will help you to color correct your videos. So let me show you. So if you click here, it shows the red color in your shot, it will show the skin, the yellow color, the green, sign, we have blue, and finally we have merchantile. We have some other options as well. Now they will make your color darker. If you increase this tent, as you can see, it will make your color darker. Let's reset this. As you can see, we can change this. Nothing happened because we have to change this then and now we can manipulate this tent by using this slider. This is before and this is after. This way, you can control your color in your picture or video. Next in this tool, we have the saturation. So if I increase my saturation to about 2%, which is the maximum amount, we can balance the saturation by using this tool and by using this tool. We can change the shadow and the highlight of the saturation by using this, and by using this, we can change the balance. Now final, we have the hue and the hue work just like the normal hue. Except what you can do with this hue is like, you can change the color. For example, let's change the blue to this green color. And now what we can do when I'm on the screen, I can check the red color. So it will take some time load in the memory of the Daventreisolve. And once it loaded, now we can see the red color and we can see the skin. So we have the maximum amount which is the red color. Now we can correct the skin tone, which is the red color, and I can bring the color. Let's select this and we can bring the color back to normal by dragging this hue to the left side. Don't worry. It will take some time to process, so you have to be patient. Now we can bring the skin tone back, which is this one. And now check this out. This is before and this is after. And if we reset the red color, this is before, and this is after we change the red color to this one and now have a look. We have the perfect skin tone. Now let's reset this, and we can also, for example, we have the sign and we have the blue, so we can also make the color darker. And by using this tool, we can also make it more darker. I'm going to bring this up, and I'm going to bring this up as well. And now check this out. Make these color darker. So this is before and this is after. We can also make skin tone darker. Like this, we can add saturation to them. So this is the saturation, and this is the den. So I'm going to bring this point up, and we have a green, yellow. We have skin tone, so we can also make skin tone darker. We can add saturation to the skin tone, and this will also make your skin tone darker, and it will also add saturation as well. Now, after you've done, check this out, we can go to the saturation or we can go to the den and we can control the den using this slider and using this slider as well. Now this is before and this is after, check this out. So this is how you can use color slide in color page. 80. Color Grading With Color Warper: Welcome back, everyone. So now we have the color warper. So beside the color slice, we have the color warper, which we can also use to color grade our videos. Now we have some few options right here, so I'm going to first of all, look at the chroma Luma. Now in chroma Luma, we have two grids. We have grid number one, which is warm and cool, and we have grade number two, which is tint and magenta. So we can select the grid number one. And once we have selected grid number one, you can see if we hover the mouse, it will highlight the point of the skin tone. So we can drag the skin tone point and we can either add a cool color or we can add a warm color. Similar to this, we can go to the green number two. Select the skin tone, we can either add a magenta or we can add a green. You can also increase the lumins. You can add highlights or you can make them darker, just like. Let's reset. Now we have some few tools to select the points. So first of all, we have selection tool which we can select any point. We can also drag this and we can place these points anywhere we want. Next we have this point, which we can draw multiple points, and once we have drawn, we can drag them anywhere we want. Let's reset this and we have this option which we can select all. And once it highlighted the point, we can click here and we can rack them individually. Just next we have this one, which we can click here to shrink them like this, and we have this one which will expand all the points. And if I show you before and after, check this out. Now let's go to the Chroma and warp. We can reset this. And now, as you can see, if I drag the mouse cursor onto my skin tone, it highlighted the color right here. So these are my skin tones, and I'm going to drag the backseat and place this right here. And as you can see, by adding just one point, we color grade this video. And now we have this film look. So this is before and this is after. Let's play this. We have close one, and now check this out. So we just added one point and we color grading the whole video. Check this out. So this is before and this is we can also add two points. So I'm going to select this, and I'm going to add a point on my skin tone, and I'm going to add a point in the background. And as you can see, it highlighted two points. So now we can drag this and we can change skin tone. Now we can hover the mouse onto the second point. And once the point is yellow, we can drag this anywhere we want and now have a look. By adding just two point, we color grade the entire video. Now you can also go back. You can change your skin tone, so don't worry about it and have a look. Not only this, we can also increase the color range. We can select any color, and from here, we can make them lighter or we can make them darker. Now the next option is the original color warper. This is the brand new color warper, and we have the OG color warpers. Now in this color warper, what you can do, as soon as you how your mouse on to your skin tone, it will highlight the points on this graph. You can also increase point on the graph. If you want to have more controls, you can add more points, but I'm going to select six point. The reason why I select point if I select eight point, and if I click here, I can rack this anywhere I want. And as you can see, it is only selecting a particular points. So we have to select this shirt and we have to track this right here. We have to select the beard. And as you can see, it is affecting particular points. So we can select the six point, and now if I select my beard, check this out. Now we are changing more points. Now I can select my skin tone as well. I can make them more accurate and now have a look this is before and this is after this is before, this is after. Check this out. Can also select any point, change the hue of the point, so we have the skin tone point, that is why we are changing the skin tone. We can also control the saturation, and we can also control the luminan. I can make my face a little bit lighter. Now I can select the background which is this one. I can click here. Once we select that, let's go to this frame. I can change the color. I can make them a cool color, and I can lower the saturation. Can also lower the luminance or we can increase the lumen. So I'm going to lower the lumina. And once we play the video, check this out. This is before and this is after. So this way, you can easily color grade your videos. Now, right here, if you mess a point, you can click here, click here. I will change the position to its original, and now click here, we can reset. If you want to reset all the graphs, simply click here. Now you can also click here and now we have this draggable window, and once you're done, you can click here and it will go back to its original position. So this is how we can use the color warper in color page. 81. Color Grading With Qualifier: Welcome back, everyone. So we have another incredible tool for color grading. This tool is called qualifier. You can simply click on it to get access to qualifier. Now, how it's work, let me show you. So first of all, I'm going to click here and I'm going to select my face. If you don't see this preview, you can select click here to enable this masking preview. Or you can press Shift plus H to disable or enable this masking preview. Now I can click here and I can drag on my face to select my face. We can also use this hue. We can increase the width of the hue. We can make it soften, and in the saturation or in the luminance, we can also control the selection as well. We can also use this pre filter to clean the mask. We can also drag this to clean the blacks. We can also clean the whites. And as you can see, now we are making perfect selection. Let's drag these points right here. We can also blur the radius, and we can select in and out just like this. Now, once you have selected your selected part, what you can do, you can either keep this or you can invert this by clicking onto this icon. It will invert this mask. Now we can click here to disable this mask preview. We can go to the offset. We can add a color and check this out. Now by doing this, it won't affect your skin tone and now have a look. So this is before and this is after. Now, if you want to add a color and you have to keep your skin tone, don't add extreme color like this. It will damage your video. Add a little bit color, so you will have a film look, but don't add to extreme color. It will destroy your video fields, and it will destroy the cinematic of your video. So by adding a little bit color, not too much. As you can see, it will change the video to cinematic. We can also use the gain. We can also use the gamma and we can also, again, use the offs. So as you can see, this is before and this is after. And we have the original skin tones. So this is before and this is now you can again, select your skin tone correctly. If you haven't by just reset this qualifier, go to the skin tone, and you can you can draw on your face, click here to enable this preview, draw on your face. And once you have done that, you can just blur the radius invert this Breast control edge and boom. So before and up check in the qualifier, we also have some other options like we have RGB, we have the Luma, and we have the three D. So let me show you because the three D is a different than these three. So all you have to do unable the mask, draw a line on your face, if you want to add multiple lines. So by doing this, you can only add one line. But if you want to add multiple line, you can click here and you can add multiple lines. And now we have more control on the selection. We can also use this pre filter. We can clean the blacks, clean the whites, we can blur the radius, and right here, we can control in and out ratio. If you invert this, click here, have a look. Now, don't worry about the line because if you select any other tool, the line will disappear. If we go back to the qualifier, now they are appear again. Now we can also click here, go to the selection, and we can also let's invert the selection again. We can also draw a line onto this part to unselected. And now as you can see, we can draw a line and we can unselect any area we want. You can press ControZ to undo this. The reason why we are having this glitch because we have multiple scene. So the professionals work on only one scene at a time. They don't work on multiple scene. So in this video, we have this AI video that is why I have multiple scenes. So if we addit color grid onto this clip, the whole clip is going to affect by that color grid. Because in this part, we have the skin tone difference, and in another part, another tones, we have another material, so that is why the default color grading which we have created is not effecting correctly onto this scene. In the close up, it worked fine, but in the white shot where we have the cars, it isn't working. So make sure you work on only one scene at a time. 82. How to do Masking: Welcome back, everyone. So we have the masking window in color page, and this is how it's work. First, we have different kinds of mask. We have five mask, linear, we have circle, polygon curve, and we have gradient. So these also are available right here. You can simply click onto any shape to access that shape. If you want to view the masking part, you can click here. And now we can view the masking part. We can also using the mouse cursor, we can also customize these shapes. We can rotate these shapes. We can also make them soften or we can make them sharper. We can also control shapes, these masks by the transform, and we can soften these shapes like this. We can rotate this, we can increase or we can lower the opacity, tilt this pan, change the aspect ratio like this, change the size as well. Now we have the circle, which is this one, you can simply click on it, and now we have the circle. Now the polygon is different than the linear because in the linear, we have softened control, but in this, we have inside and we have outside as well. We have also transformed control that we had in other mask as well. Next, we have the curve which we can use to draw custom shapes. Like this, we can also invert any shape by clicking onto this icon. It will invert your selection. Final, we had the gradient. Now we can simply draw this gradient. We can place this anywhere we want. We can click here to disable the preview masking. We can add a color, so we can clearly see what we are masking. Now as you can see, we can mask out any part that we want. So we can drag this right here. So for example, the use case is if you want to make this part of the video darker, or you can do reset the offset, lower the offset, invert the selection. Now, once it highlighted this icon, it means you inverted the selection. Make the darker, we can add color, and now have a look. We can also place this right here. We can also increase this arrow, so we have a little bit soft color, not a sharper one. Now we also have this icon, and let me show you how this works. So I'm going to reset my node, and I'm going to draw a circle. I'm going to lower my soften to 0%. We can zoom out, draw a circle. Now, one more thing, if you want to disable this mass, simply click onto the shape that you have added and you can label it again by clicking onto it. Now if you want to add another mask of any shape, simply just click on it and it will add another mask of your selected shape. I'm going to also lower the softness to zero parts. Now as you can see, we have a circle and we have a small circle. I'm going to click here so we can clearly see the preview. I'm going to select my new circle, which is this one, and I'm going to click here. Now as you can see, now it is masking on top of the big circle mask. So I'm going to add a color so you can better understand what we are doing. I'm going to add this color. If we go back to the video, check this out. This way, by clicking onto this, you can, for example, add a large mask and we have a small mask inside the mask. If you want to mask out the large mask, you can click here. It will mask out the large mask, and this is how we can use the mask in color page. 83. Mask Tracking in Color Page: Welcome back, everyone. So in color page, we also have tracking. This is how tracking work. First of all, I'm going to add a circle. I'm going to lower the softness to zero, lower the size, and I'm going to track my face. Now you can also add custom shapes with the curve, but I'm going to select this circle for this example. Now go to the tracking. So this is the tracking window, and in tracking window, you can either track forward and backward by clicking onto this icon, or you can track forward and track backward. Or you can track next frame. Now if you don't have these unable, just enable them. And once you have that, you can track forward or backward or any position that you like. And as you can see, guys, we have this mask. Now, once we have this mask, we can click here to view the mask. We can go to the mask invert sk. And we also have this icon which indicate that we have a tracking mask. Now, the best thing that you can do if you have a tracking mask is you can add any effects. So for example, I can drag a directional blur. I can uncheck this. I can customize this directional blur. And once we have that, we can click here and have a look. It is affecting everything else except my face. We can also add a little bit color. We can also lower the offset, and we can also lower the gain and have a look. Now we can also do one more thing. I can just reset my tracking mask and I can draw a custom shape. So I'm going to go to the first frame. I can draw a random shape, just the outline, and we also have to connect these dots together. Once we have this, we can track forward. We can also click here. Once we done, we can invert this mask. We can go to the softness. We can increase the softness. We can also increase the inside and we can also increase the outside. And once we have that, check this out, we have created this effect. Now we can also increase the directional blur so we won't see any mess in the background. We can also right click and we can also add outside. And once we have the outside, we can also effect the inside mask. We can also right click add another outside, and now we have more control over the background. So in the background, we can also add this radial blur and have a look. We have created something like this. We can also add a color so it will look cool and boom. Check this out. Isn't this amazing what you can do with the tracking mask? Now you can go to the library and you can add any effect. So I can add this camera shake. We can lower the motion scale, lower the speed, and boom. So this is how we can use tracking in color page. 84. Learn Blur, Mist , Key Masking and Sizing Node: Now, next, we have the key mask window, and I'm going to add a serial and select the second node. Go to the masking window, and I'm going to add a circle mask on top of my face. Now if we go to the key mask window, the second node has a mask in it. That is why we have the circle upear right here. So it shows the mask. If it's the first one, we don't have any mask because we don't have any mask on top of this node. Now I can select the second node, and using the key output, we can control the gain of the mask. So what is the gain? I'm going to reset my key mask. I'm going to select my node, and I'm going to add a color. So let's add a red color so we can clearly see what is going on. I'm going to add a contrast so we can have a clean version of this video. Now in the gain, as you can see, if I lower my gain, it also it is lowering the mask opacity. If we click here, we can see the mask. So this is the gain before and this is after. So we can lowering the gain. We can also change the offset. So let's reset this what the hell is offset. Now if I lower my offset, as you can see, it soften the mask from inside. But if we increase the offset, as you can see, now it is spreading the mask across the circle. So let me add a red color, strong color and I'm going to reset this so we can go back. Sometime we have this glitch, so we have to go back. We can select any feature, and then you can go back to your key window. And then it will fix. Now as you can see if I lower this, it is doing the mask inside the circle. If we go outside, increase the offset, now it is going outside the circle. Next we got the qualifier, and if you have a qualifier, if for example, you have the circle and you go to the key window, you lower the gain. As you can see, nothing is happening because this is for the qualifier. So we can go to the qualifier. I can select my skin tone. So I'm just going to select this random skin tone. Go to the key window, click here, and as you can see, I'm going to add a red color again. We can lower the gain, increase again, we can lower the offset or we can increase the offset. And one more thing, we can invert the selection. And now we can lower the gain and we can lower the offset. Click here, I can lower my offset or I can increase it. So this way you can also color grade your videos. This way, you can customize your mask. Now to explain the node sizing, I'm going to select the color, go to nodes, and in nodes, what we can do, we can add splitter and combine. As you can see, guys, we have these three options. Don't worry. We will cover splitter and combiner later in the lecture. But for now, we can select This is the red color, this is the green, this is the blue color because in this node, you can see the first color is red, we have green and we have blue. So we can select the blue color or the red color. Can increase the node sizing of this. As you can see, we have a glitch effect. So I can go to any video and check. We can control this. We can also go to the effects, and I'm going to select the box blur on top of this video and check this out. If you want to view this color, simply go to here, and as you can see, it shows all the color. So this is the blue color, this is the green color, and this is the red color. You can go to the previous video. So this is green, blue and red. You can go back. So this is the red color. This is the green, and this is the blue color. So if we go to the red color, as you can see, it highlighted these color. If I uncheck this, check this out. These are the red color options right here. So look at the red color. If I check this, it highlighted this color. It means this is the red color, and this is the green color which is highlighted. And if we click here, this is the blue color, these are highlighted. So as you can see, these are the blue color shades. Now next, if you want to blur your video or sharpen your video, we have this tool as well. So as you can see, we have three options. First, we have the blur. So if you take the radius up, it will blur your video, and if you bring this down, it will sharpen your video. You can also unlink and you can soften the red color, or you can soften the green color, or you can soften the blue color. If we reset this, if you bring this down, we can sharpen a particular color like blue. We can bring this down to have a green, sharpen color or we can bring this down to have a red sharpened color. I'm going to reset this, connect this. So now if I add a sharpen, we can also control the HV radius. So if you blur your video, as you can see, we can control the H V ratio, which is the directional blur for this effect. We can also go to the sharpen, and as you can see, this tool is now available. So what we can do, we can bring this down and we can also bring this up or down to make your video more sharper, or you can make it more smoother like this. Now, finally we have the mist. So I'm going to reset my tool as you can see in mist, we have the same options. We can add the softness to the video. Bring this down, you can bring this up. We have the same effect. But as you can see, we have the slider which we can use to balance if you want the sharpen or if you want the softness. We can go to this tool, the sharpen and we can also play around with the level and we can also play around with this coring softness. Let's reset this node. 85. Learn to Use Color Scopes: R. Welcome back, everyone. The most important part of the color page is the scope, which is right here. Now we can click here and now we have this large screen up here and we have four different scope. We can also change this to one to two to four, and we have these options as well. Now we can close this and first, we have this parade. Now if you change any color, as you can see, guys, we can clearly see in the scope which color is on top and which color is in the bottom. We can use this scope to color balance and white balance our short. You can also change this to waveform, and now we have the waveform. We have the blue color on top, and then we have another color. So what we can do, we can take the blue down and we can just a little bit. We can also control the blue from here. We can also control the green from here and red from here. Now you can also go to the vectorscope. Now the vectorscope is usually used for the skin tone. So let me show you how you can use this for skin tone. First, select the vectorscope, then click here and enable skin tone indicator. This line indicate the skin tone. For example, if you color in your video, we can add a node, add a serial, and what we can do, I can zoom in. I can click here and I can draw on my face. And as you can see the color that we had, which is this one, I'm going to zoom in. The color, which is this one is a little bit on the left side than this indicator. So I'm going to place this right here and what we can do, I can use my offset and I can match my skin tone on top of this. Now what we can do, if we click onto this mass curve again, we have the perfect skin tone. So I can press Control D, this is before, and this is after. Check this out. This way, you can correct your skin tone. You can use the gain as well. You don't have to use the offset. You can use the gain. So I can reset this. I can have a large preview of this scope and I can use my gain and check this. We can again use the offset a little bit. If if the line is going further, then you are messing your skin tone. Are increasing the saturation of your skin. Now we can also increase and we can again, visually see the correct line. Once you correct your skin tone, simply change saturation to 50%. Close this, click here. We can uncheck this and boom. This is before, and this is after. Check how much we clean the video. So this is before, we have the yellow color across all the video, and now we have the clean video. Next we have this histogram, which we can also use to color grade the videos, so we can clearly see which color has a large amount in this video. So now we have the red color. We have the green, we have the blue. So this is how we can use these spes in color page. 86. Keyframes in Color Page: Welcome back, everyone. So now next we have keyframe. Yes, we have keyframe in color page, and this is how they work. First of all, I'm going to select the qualifier and I'm going to click here. I'm going to add a keyframe in the corrector, and I'm going to drag my color warper. Now, once it added this keyframe, we can go further in the video and we can add a color, for example, and I can correct my skin tone, and I can also add contrast to the videos. And now if we go back, I can, track this right here. Now, if I play my clip, as you can see, we are increasing the contrast and we are also playing around with the color warper. So I can drag this point right here and check this out. No I don't highly recommend to use the keyframe in color page because we have the keyframe in the color page, and it doesn't mean that you have to use the keyframe in the color page because we have the option. But you can use them for some effects like this color effect that I have created. We can also reset this. And as you can see, the keyframe is not reset. At all. So we can reset the node, and now we have the keyframe reset to its original position. Now we can also add, again, keyframe in the sizing, go to the node sizing. We can add a pan tilt, nothing is happened. Go to the input size, add a pen, and now we have a keyframe. Now what we can do, we can go frame ahead. We can zoom in. We can rotate and check this. We have a Zoom and we have rot. You can do this exact same thing and it will take less time than this, and you will have more control over your keyframes than the keyframe that we had in color page. So you just learn keyframe in color page, and I don't think you ever going to use them in color page. But this is how we can use keyframes in color page. 87. How to Use Node Mixer: Welcome back, everyone. Now, next, we have node mixture. So what are node mixture? First of all, you can right click onto the empty space, go to the Add node, and we have different options. Then we have the usual Add node option. Well, in these options, we have corrector, which is the same as the CDL. We add the character, as you can see, it is the same as we add a serial node. Now next, if you right click, we have parallel mixture, we have layer mixture. Now, instead of adding the mixture separately, you can select your node. If you have multiple node, for example, you want to add mixture after the first node, then you have to select your first node. Once it turns right, it means you have selected your node. And once you selected your node, you can add a parallel mixture. Or you can delete this. You can select the second. You can add layer mixture. So this one is called mixture. I can delete this. Now I'm going to also delete this as well. Now next guys, we have a different mixture than these two. We have key mix. So this is how key mixture work. If you want to add two mask in your video, you can simply add cereal. So we have two cereal. I'm going to drag the first one right here. I'm going to disconnect this. I'm going to drag this and connect this to the third one. I'm going to select my first one. I'm going to add a mask on top of the character, which is the first one, and I'm going to track my arrector. Let's place this right here, and now we can track forward and track backward. Now we can select this one and go to the circle. I'm going to lower the size. Now let's also track this as well. Once we have two mask, disconnect this. We can add a key mixture, connect the mask to this one and connect this one to this one. Now as you can see, we have two separate mask. Now, once we have done this, we can simply I can click here. We can add a corrector. We can connect this video to this. We can connect the mask to this video, and finally we can connect this to the output. Now we can do anything that we want to do onto this mask. You can add a highlight or you can make them darker. Reset now if you change anything on top of these mask, it won't happen because these are the mask, and this is the final output of these mask. So you have to manipulate this node in order to work with multiple mask. And final guys, we have splitter and we have combiner. And instead of adding them separately again, you can add them easily by going to the color by going to the head node, and by selecting head splitter and combiner node. And in this splitter and combiner, we have red, green, and we have blue color. Like we have the cop, red, green, and blue, these are red, green, and blue. You can clearly see in the mixture, we have red, green, and blue. If you want to see their mask, their Alpha, this is Alpha of red color. This is the green color, and this is the blue color. The blue color is highlighted. So if I click here unchecked, this is also the blue color shade. This is also the blue color. So as you can see, it is highlighted. We have the green, we have the red here you can manipulate them easily. If you go to the curve, if you select this one, I'm going to add a serial after this. I'm going to select my red color. And if I drag this up, as you can see, we are adding a red color, and we are adding a green color. Like if you select this one, as you can see, this is exactly the same thing. If you select this one, this is exactly the same thing. And this is also the same thing as we have the blue in the curve. We have the green in the curve as well. So now I'm going to reset and one more thing that you can do, you can go to the key sizing, and in the previous lecture that we discussed, we can also add a width of this color, and we can add a glitch of this color. If you want to add a green color glitch, then you can also increase the width of the green color. And now, as you can see, guys, we have green color glitch. And same we can add a blue colour glitch. So as you can see, we added this glitch. Now let's reset this. And we can also tate this, check this. So this is the blue color, and this is the green color and final, we have red color. Let's reset this. You can also go to the gain and you can increase the gain of the red or you can lower the gain. So this is how you can use node mixture in color page. 88. How to Create Custom Luts in Color Page: Welcome back, everyone. So now I'm going to share with you amazing feature of color page, which is right click graphs. So how graphs will work, let me explain. First of all, I'm going to add a contrast. I'm going to increase my gain. I'm going to lower my Gamma, increase gain. I'm going to increase my offset. Now next I'm going to go to the color warper. I'm going to add a blue color, this one, and using the offset, I'm going to control this. So as you can see, this is before and this is after. Now this is just a random color grading. Can also select this, and let's change this to white. So now have a look. Now in the game, I can add a color, and in the color warper, in the white, we can choo white, and let's add a lift. We can lower the lift. Let's add. As you can see, we add this color, we color grade this video. Now what you can do, if you click here in the gallery, we can right click and grab still. So we have this still. Now it doesn't matter how many nodes you have. You can reset this. You can either click here. You can preview this or what you can do, you can right click and you can apply grade. And as you can see it applied the same changes that we made in the grade before and it added that in the default node. We can reset this, and I'm going to share with you that how strong the graph still is. So in my first node, I'm going to increase my contrast. Let's add another serial. In my second, I'm going to increase my saturation. Let's add another one. And in this, I'm going to let's go to the versus, change the hues like the red, track this down. Perfect. Now we can right click add another serial, or you can add a serial from here. What we can do, we can lower the lift. We can add a color in this one. Maybe let's add as you can see, we have four different nodes and we have four different features in these nodes as well. So now I'm going to grab still, go to the calory, reset all the nodes. We can either select this and we can see the before and after. We can also select different shapes. We can select this one, this one, or we can select this one. This is crazy or we can select this one. You can increase or lower the this is the best option, by the way, if you want to see the before and after. Now, if we apply grid, as you can see, we have the same four different nodes that we worked before. Now here's the crazy part. It doesn't matter if you have any video, you can simply click to disable this. We can also apply this grid to this video as well, and we can also apply this to this video as well, and we can apply this to any video that we want. So it doesn't matter. This is the power of using grab still. More thing, we can also right click and we can export this lt. So we can use this later. So we can either export this as JPG, and it will save this as a picture or we can export this display alert. So I can export this. And once you export your alert, we can delete this lt that we export it. And this is the DRX file. This is for the alert, so we can go to the color page and go to the gallery. We can drag and drop this right here. And as you can see, if I reset everything, can even preview the lead by hovering the mouse from right to left or left to right. Let's go to the main video, reset this apply grade, and now have a look. So this is how we can use the grab still in color page. 89. How to Use Preview Controls: Hey. Welcome back, everyone. So like the preview control of the dit page, we also have some preview control in the color page. So first one, we have the qualifier, and it works almost in every feature that we have. So for example, we have U versus if I click here, it added a point right here. If we go to the curve, if I click here, it add a point where we have the skin tone. If we go to the color warper, as you can see, we are using this qualifier. Right here, we also using the qualifier, and for this, this is called the qualifier, and this is also called the qualifier. So we definitely going to use this for this feature. This one is the qualifier. Next, we have the power window, and the power window is used to control the mask on the previous screen. If you turn this off, you can't really control the mask. If you turn this on, you can control the mask now. Next, we got the image wipe, and this is for the comparison. So I'm going to select this one. And by the way, it shows the image, the exact same frame where we grab the still. So this is a position where we grab the still, so maybe not this one, maybe you can see, you can clearly see before and after this is image vibe. You can also access this by clicking here. Next, we got the open effects overlay, and this is for the effects. So let me show you. I'm going to add a radio blur, and as you can see, we are controlling the radio blur on the previous screen, and we have selected open effects overlay. If you disable this, you can't really control the radio blur. Now we can control it on the previous screen. Next we got the color chart. So what is the color chart? Now, this chart is used by the professional to collect corrective video. It shows the correct color. You can easily correct your color of your video. So as you can see, I am using this classic chart. This is, by the way, the AI generated picture. I don't have this checker. We can align this checker. If you have large checker, you can also customize the shape. You can reset the shape from once you align the chart, according to your chart, we have different kind of chart. So if I click check this out, we have several chart. But for this video, I have this classic chart. Now here's some few things that you need to keep this in mind. First, we have the source Gamma, so I don't know the source gamma for this picture, so I'm just going to keep this auto. We have the target gamma. Now, the target gamma is what you want to convert this image or video for. So I'm going to convert this for a Log two. And we have target color space. For the color space, I'm going to select Sony as gamut. I have a Sony camera, so that is why I have the information about this color space and for this gamma as well. Now, once you've done this, you can simply click here onto the match button, and as you can see it matches perfectly. We have the aslogT. We have a gamut color space. You can change this to any color space you want, so I'm going to reset this. I'm going to enable my color chart, place this correctly. Let's this time, I'm going to select cannon log and colored space. I'm going to also select Reg seven or nine. And if you click here, check this. Now we can simply add a contrast. Now we have more control over this picture than before. So if I shows you the result, this is before and this is after. This way, you can easily color correct your picture or video. Now next time the final we have annotation that we used before in the edit page, the cut page, or in other pages as well, so I'm not going to explain this because it's going to waste your time and mine as well. This is how we can use these preview controls in color page. 90. Steal Any Color Grades: Welcome back, everyone. Now I'm going to share with you a awesome feature of color page. You can steal any color grid of any film, any picture, any video. It doesn't matter. As you can see, in my timeline, I have four clip, and I also have three reference. So I want to copy the Joker style color grid, and I want to paste that to my video. So how can we do that? Go to the color page and go to the clips, select your clip first, and then press Control and select the reference that you want to copy the color grid from. Once you select them, right click and select short match to this clip. And as you can see in just one click, this is before, and this is after. Now, you can tweak some settings like you can go to the air node and add a serial before this node. You can go to curve slightly bright the highlight. You can also bright the shadow. As you can see, guys, now we have this awesome color grade. So this is before and this is after. This look also fantastic, but as you can see, we can also add more light and we can also customize it even more. Now, if you want to copy this to all the clips, you can simply select all the clips, right click to the shot that you want to match, short match to this. And as you can see, now we copy this to every other clip. Now I can select. Let's reset this, select my clip, and I can right click to this image, short match to this clip, and boom. You don't have to even select the reference. You can click add a serial before, and I can take the highlight up and I can also add more light to the shot and check this. So before and after. Let's add more depth. Let's reset, right click, short match to this and boom. If you have a bright color like this, you can add a serial before and you can also make them target like this. Take this down a little bit, can also lower the saturation and boom we fixed. Now I can select my video, right click, reset, right click here, and I can short match to this clip and have this way, you can easily steal any color grade from any video and picture in color page. 91. Convert Flat Video in Color Page: Welcome back, everyone. Now, I'm going to show you how professionals color grade their videos. So first of all, I have this clip, and I use Sony ZVE ten to short this clip. I have aslog maybe two or three, and I have a color space as Game three or maybe as gamete. So first of all, we have to convert these to the normal this is the As Log video, so we have to go to the effects. We can go to the search bar and search for color space, and you can drag and rope. Now, once we do that, we have input Gamma and we have output color space. So my Gamma was aslo three, so I can scroll down and as you can see, Sony aslogT if you select this, check this out. We can select even Asog three. And if I shows you this is before and this is after reason why do people shot on As log three because you will have more control over your shot than your default settings in your camera. So I can select my color, so I can even select Rec seven oh nine, or you can select any color. So I can select Sony as Cat maybe as Camera three. Or maybe we can go back to Rec seven oh nine. Now, once we've done that, we can click here to disable the effects, and we can right click add a serial before. If your shot is too bright, you can bring the shot down by dragging the gain to the left side. And as you can see the reason why I have added the node. So I'm sorry I'm doing this in the same node. The reason why I have added a node before my color space is because if I change my gamma before my color space, this is what is happening. And if I reset this and add a serial after the color space is affecting after the color space. So we need to correct the video before the color space. So now I can bring the gain down Gamma up or I can bring the gamma up and gain down. So as you can see, we have a huge difference. You can even add a little bit contrast, so you will get this sharp look. And after that, we can right click, add a serial. We can lower the lift, add a color to the lift, and to compliment the color, we can add color in Gammas I can add a color. Let's add the blue color. And now I can compliment the color by dragging the studio opposite side. I can bring the offset down a little bit, bring the gain up, and in my Gamma, I can also change this. So this is before and this is after. Now we can also go to the curve, slightly take this up, select the red, and we can bring the red down. We can reset this and we can have and we can also increase the saturation spring the red. So before and after. So you can choose which color you want in your video. I have the next example, which is this one, as you can see, this is pretty much flat video, so we can go to the effect, drag the color space, and same, we can select Alok three x seven oh nine. And before we can just bring the gain down, game up, gain down, add a contrast. So as you can see, we are taking this to the next level. So we can bring the gain down because I can't really see my face, bring the offset up at a contrast. Now I can add a node after we can add color, so we can go to the color warper, add a color slightly green. And once we have that, we can add this and check this. So before and can also increase the saturation, 60%. You can even add a color boost of 10%. So before and after, you can see pretty much. So this is flat and this is after. So you can see we have a huge difference. Now I have a hack for you. If you really want to collect reactive video, this is pretty much work on every single clip. So now I can go to the next example. I can add color space and select Alok Rec 79, we done. And now before this, we can add a serial. And in this year, what you can do its work almost on every clip, if your clip is too much bright, what you can do, you can bring the gain down. And as I'm doing this, you can focus on the graph. So we can bring the gain down Gamma up, gain down Gamma up. So as you can see, we balance these scopes, gain down, gamma up. And as you can see, this is before and this is after. Now, after you've done that, I really want you to focus on this graph on this scope. If I increase my contrast, as you can see, it is spreading the color. So this is before and this is after. Check how much weekly in the shot. So right now we have so much noise. This is before and this is after. Look at my face before and off. Look how much we clean in the shot. So I can bring my gain down gamma up, bring my gain down, gamma up, add a contrast and boom before and after before and off. So this trick work on almost every single clay. Now after that, we can add any color grade, so I can add the blue, lower, the lift. We can also go to the log because we are not using log a lot, so we can increase the shadow, add a color in the shadow. Now we can also control the pivot of the contrast. Now in the final, I can color grade my video. So I can add a color, select my skin tone. I can track this right about here. And in the game, I can also add a color and boom before and off before, after, before also have this outdoor clip because the previous clip are shot indoor. Now for this video, we don't need to convert this. We don't need to use the color space on this video because this is AI generated video and we don't know what color space and what gama the AI used for this video. Now, if you don't know what the gama and the color space of your video, don't use colors. Just play around with the contrast and play around with the piv. So this is before and this is after. Now I can also increase my gain, increase my gamma, increase my contrast. So before and after. So before for this, I can add a cereal. Go to the color warper. I can add a blue color. Now, you don't have to add to extreme color because it won't work. So if I select my skin tone, as you can see, the color is not working. Maybe you can bring the saturation down. We can also add a gain to complement this color. So we added the blue color, so I'm dragging my gain opposite to the blue color, which is red. So as you can see, we pretty much created this look before and after, and it's more cleaner than before. I reset my gain, as you can see, we have the blue color all over the place. So if you added a blue color, you can drag the gain to the opposite side of the blue, which is red. And this is how you can color grading video. And for example, let's reset. If you add maybe this green color, you have to also drag the gain to the red because this is opposite of the green. So this way, you can create these kind of color grades. So before and after, it's more clean than before. And we don't have any glitches in this video. You go to extreme, then you will notice that we have some glitch, before and off. So don't go to extreme, just keep this graph in this radio and before and after. Now, another way to collect radio video is you can add a cool color, for example, and then you can use a tint to complement this color, and then you can use the gain to complement these two color. And this way, you can see we have now created a new lot. And as you can see, the yellow color is not correctly displayed, so we can play around with the gain once we happy before and after. You can see, I'm slightly adding a third color. I'm not adding too much color because in that method, you can destroy your entire video color grade. So add a slightly color of your choice, and then you can play around with the gain gamma of set or the leaf to color correct your video. So before and after, check this out. And also, we clean so much because this is a white shirt. So after that, as you can see, we clean the shot a lot as well. So before, after before. So this is the method that I use to color grade my videos. We have a lot of tools. You learn about every single tools. Now it's your time to use this tool and color grade your video. 92. Fairlight: Introduction: Welcome back, everyone. Now we are going to edit this audio in Fairlight. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan Amjed. This is the audio test. We are going to take this audio and we are going to edit this audio in DaVinci Dissolve. So without wasting your time, let's get started. Hey have this audio. Now go to the Fairlight. Click here. First of all, if you want to zoom in and zoom out vertically, you can press Shift key, use your MuscrollT zoom in and zoom out vertically. For horizontally, you can press Alt key use mouse scroll to zoom in and zoom out. You can also use these slider. For horizontally, we have this one. For vertically, we have this one. Now, if you go to the media, you can also select the part of your audio, a particular part of your audio, and then you can import that in Fairlight. So let me show you first of all, go to the media and if you accidentally select your timeline and press I on the keyboard and press O on the keyboard, it will select your timeline, not the audio. So go to the marker and clear in and out. It will clear all the marker. You can select your audio. And now we can press I to trim out the starting part of the audio. And you can O to trim out the end part of this audio. Now, as you can see, we also have two lines up here. So now we can drag this audio and drop this. This way, you can only import the selected part of your audio. Now let's reset this, go to the starting point, press I, go to the endpoint, press O. And now we can delete this or you can keep this. We also have effects for the audio. We also have the index, so I'm going to disable the media in effect. And as you can see, we have the index for the audio two and for you add another track, it will show that in audio number two, we don't have any audio. In three, we have this audio and one, we have this audio. We also have sound library that you can download, and it's completely free. You can download the sound library, and it is from the DaVinci Resolve. You have empty track, you can right click and you can delete empty tracks. Right here, we have track number one and track number two. For example, we can press Alt key. We can drag this audio right here to duplicate this audio. We have track number four. But as you can see in the mixture, we only have two tracks. So you can simply drag this interface to the left side, and now as you can see, we have four audio track. Number four, number three, number two and number one. You can also right click and delete the track. Now we also have this preview screen. So I'm going to add my video in timeline, and I'm going to also lower the volume for the audio for this video. Now if I play my clip that you're about to witness, it shows the preview plus the audio of this clip. We can also click here, and now we have this floating viewer. We can also click here and it will go back to its default setting. You also have these audio levels, so as you can see it shows the first audio level. But if you go to this part, it shows the second audio level right here. So these are the audio level DBs. Now, this line represent the left ear and this line reps the right ear. So if I select my audio, go to the number one because this is track number one, we can double click on pen and if I drag this to the left side, and now if I close we are going to as you can see, now you can only listen to the audio in your left ear to take this audio, and this audio level is higher than the right because we are listening to the audio from the left ear. If we change this to the right ear, so I'm going to change this to the right ear and now check this out. We are listening to the audio in the right ear, and the right ear DB is also shown right here. So this is the right audio DB, and this is the left audio DV. So this is the interface of Fairlight. 93. Timeline Editing Tool: Welcome back, everyone. Next, we have timeline editing tools. First of all, we have the pointer mode. We can select this playhead and we can place it anywhere we want. This is like the selection tool. Now, right here, we have the range mode, which you can access by pressing the R on the keyboard, and what it does, you can select a particular portion of your audio and you can change the DB of the selected part of your audio. Once you unselect this, as you can see, we have this audio, and we also have this in and out mark, which you can go to Mark and you can clear this in and out mark. Next, we have this focus mode you select this going to take, it work pretty much like this range mode, but as you can see, if you select any portion of your audio, if I play my audio, this is audio test and press space again, it will stop right here. This is audio test, and when I press space again to play the audio, it will start from the start. Was if we select this mode, if I select any range of the audio, we are in Dani. Play my audio press space to stop the audio. And if I play again, it will continue from where we left it, whereas in the focus mode, it will restart from the starting point. So without wasting your time I press space, it stop, and if I press space again, so it is restarting from the starting point. Next, we have this blade mode or eraser, which you can simply click here. You can add a cut to your audio in anywhere you want. Now, next, we have the same tools, magnet and linked and unlinked tool, these flag and and marker. These are the same exact tool that we used in Additw quick rewind if we uncheck this, you can't really connect your audio. So if you, for example, check this. As you can see, it is snapping like the magnet. And if you unlink your audio, for example, if I place my audio right here, we have the negative time. If we go to the Edit page, as you can see, this is indicating that we are unlinking this audio. If we go to the Fairlight, click here, link the audio, check this out. And we have the same flags, which you can edit in anywhere you want, so I can select my audio, add flag to the whole audio track, and then I can click here. Double click, select the flag color, and we can add a node. If you want to remove the flag, double click and click here, it will remove the flag. And next we have this marker which you can add to a particular point. And once you're done, you can simply click and clear all, it will clear all the marker. 94. How to Edit Tracks: Welcome back, everyone. Next, we have timeline editing Tracks tool. So if you click here, as you can see, you can display video track. This is the video track. You can disable this. You can also unable display full waveform, and it will display full waveform of your audio. Now, next, we have timeline scrolling. Right now, we set to page scrolling. If you select fixed Playhead as you can see, now we need to drag the timeline if we play the audio. Now the timeline is moving and we have this fixed playhead. Let's go to the no scrolling. If you click here, as you can see, we don't have any scrolling. It's pretty much like the default, which is page scrolling. Next, we have the display video scroller. So as you can see, this is the display video for this audio. Now right now it display a blank screen because we don't have any video of this audio track. But if you go to this video, as you can see, now we have the audio of this video. Now we can disable this and we can enable display audio scroller. Now as you can see, we can look at the waveform. You can also switch to different audio track if you have one, so we can track this right here. And as you can see, now we have audio track number two, press Control Z to undo this. Let's disable. Now we also have the timeline views. As you can see, currently with set to one. If you set to two, it will shows the entire timeline, and if you go further further and further, as you can see, it is changing. Let's change these two back to timeline view number one. Now next, if you right click on your audio track, you can add audio track like Mono or Studio. You can duplicate this track, delete it. If you have empty tracks, you can also delete them. Now, currently, we have audio track. You can also change your audio track to Mono by simply going to change track type to bono. And now we can change this back to Stedio. We can also right click and we can change the track color to anyone. So if you have, for example, different track, so I can right click and I can go to Track color and I can change the track color for this to brown. You can use different effects on different audio and you can tell the difference by looking at them. So for example, if you change the inspector, if you, for example, add equalizer, let's randomly change these points, you can easily tell that this audio is different than the others. So let's change the default color to this one, and as you can see, we can easily tell that this audio has some effect on it. Let's reset now next, if you click, we have attributes. So if you click, we don't have copy attribute option right here. So what you can do, for example, I'm going to add an effect on top of the first audio. And now what I can do, I can simply let's add this effect. Dimen citas. As you can see, we have distortion effect. So I can press Control C, and I can select my audio track, right click and select Paste attribute. Now, as you can see in clip attribute, we also have the color of this audio track, and we have plug in, which is the effect. If you apply, it will copy the color, and it will copy the effect which is distortion. That is completely generated now I can right click. If you want to remove the attribute, simply click here, check these two apply and booth. Using Google back to normal. We can also delete this effect. Now, if you right click on your audio track, as you can see, we can reverse this clip Enclip operation, we have EQ matcher. So we can match this Q, and we can apply this IQ level to this one. So let me show you how we can do. Right click, go to clip Operation, go to Q matcher, capture Q profile. Now I can right click Q operation, EQ matcher and apply to clip EQ. And as you can see right here, we have the sameQ of this audio. Now, next, if you right click, go to clip operation, we have level matcher. You can capture the level of this profile of this audio track. And you can apply this to audio number two. I can apply this and check this out. It automatically reduce my volume, and it matches the waveform of the first audio. So if I increase my audio DB, which is volume, I can recapture it, so capture the level and we can apply the level to this and check this out. This way, you will have a constant audio DB of the entire tracks in your timeline. You can also right click Go clip operation and you can analyze the audio level. Have to click here, Analyze audio level, and as you can see, this is my audio level. Now we can close this. We can also right click. Again, go to clip operation and we can normalize audio level. So you can select your audio level type, so I can select this mode, and I can select minus two and normalize. And as you can see, it automatically increase my level to seven. And if I chose you, listen to this before. Hi, everyone. My name is Pez nm JD. And this is after. Hi, everyone, my name is Ps num we have more volume than before. So these are the timeline tracks features that we can use to edit our audio. 95. Adding Audio Effects: Right. Welcome back, everyone. Now, next, we have effects. Simply, you can drag and drop any effect onto your audio. And right here, we have pre made presets. So you can select any. You can simply press space to listen to your audio. Hi, everyone. My name is. You can change any preset. This is audio test. We are going to take this audio and we are going to edit this audio indiviGisolve. So without wasting your time, let's get started. Hi, everyone. My name is Pazanmhed. This is audio test. We are going this audio and now you can also go to B. You can have a different effect. So for example, I'm going to select this one. And now, as you can see, we can switch which one you like and which one you want to keep. So for example, let's play the audio. Hi one minus. Let's toggle A. This is audio test. Now, total B. Audio and we are going to edit this. This way, you can easily select which one is best option for you. You can also audio indissolve check to disable and check this to enable the effect. We can also close this and we can also reset this from here. Now, go to Inspector, go to effect, and as you can see, we have audio effect, we can delete this as well. We can also customize this if you want. Next, we have similar, which is echo. We can simply play audio or we can select this portion. And now we can in a loop, we can edit this audio. This is how you can apply these effects, so we can reset this clause, go to effect. And as you can see, we have more option in the audio effects. We can delete this. Next, I want to apply reverb, apply the effect. TermolHi my name is This test. We are going to take this audio and we are going to edit this audio resolve. Hi, everyone, my name is. You can also customize your effect if you want to and you can also tweak these sliders, these wheels in order to customize your effect. We are going to take this audio and we are edit this audio interment resolve. Hi everyone. My name is Now, these wheels are now converted to slider in this effect. You can choose whether you like this or you like the wheels. Finally, I'm going to add this effect. And as you can see, we don't have any preset. So if you have this type of effect, you can simply customize or effect and I can apply passion dissolve. Compressor you can customize the compressor. This audio. This Now right here, we can select these graphs. Audio, and we are going to edit this audio Invent dissolve. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan Amjed is audio test. Now, as you can see, the vocals are now crisp clear than before. Take this audio. This is before. We're going to edit this audio Invent Dissolve. Hi, everyone, my name is Faizan Amjed. This is audio test. We are going to take this audio, and we are going to edit this audio IntVnt Dissolve. Hi, everyone, my name is Faizan Amjed. This is. You can add a bass point. I'm going to edit this audio Intent Dsolve. Hi, everyone, my name is Faizan Amjed. Before this is audio test, we are going to take this audio and we are going to edit this audio DaVinci Resolve. By the way, if you have created something like this, you can save this as a preset. So currently, we don't have any preset, so you can simply click here, name your preset. So I name my preset, my vocals, click here on Okay button, and as you can see, now we have this preset. Now, if you reset this, close this window, delete this, you can go back to vocal channel, click here, and as you can see, this is the preset that we created. So we can select this preset and boom. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan Jud. So this is how you can use effects in fair light. 96. Audio Automation: Welcome back, everyone. Now we have an interesting feature that lets you edit live audio. It's called automation. First, you need to click here to enable it. Now you need to click here, and it shows all the options that you can edit while listening to your audio live. Now I can turn this on by selecting Latch. We have two tools. We have this one, and we have this one. Now, first of all, I am going to select Pan. Double click. I'm going to edit this band from left to right, so I can listen to the audio. One, my name is Faizan Amjed. Now the reason why it is not working because we have to unable it from here. So I can select pen, go back, double click. And now if I play. Hi, everyone, my name is Faizan Amjed Left. This is audio test Right are going to take this audio and left are going to edit this audio. Right. Left and stop. Now, if we close this, as you can see, if we double click. Hi, everyone. The pen is changing. But we don't see any keyframe. Well, to enable the keyframe, you have to click here. It's set to nun. Have to go to pen because we animate pen, you have to select left and right pen. If you select FB pen, we still don't have anything. If you select pan left to right. Now we have this graph. Now it shows left to right pen. So this dip represent right here and this peak represent the left ear. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan we have right here. Audio. Now we are switching to left. We can also click here, select this pen. We can also redraw this graph and boom. We are going to take this audio and we are going to edit this audio now if you select this tool, you drag the audio, the keyframes move along with the track. But if you disable this tool, it allows you to move the track. Now, as you can see, we move the track, and this is the keyframe. We can enable this and now as you can see, we are overlapping these keyframes. We can also disable this, place this right here, enable this, go back to original position, and we don't have any keyframe. If you want to listen to this in high speed, this is a best option. What you can do reset the effect, play the audio press A on the keyboard. Or you can simply click here like this pen and you can draw a line. Now let's animate the Q so I can disable this enable EQ clickeG to EQ gain because I'm going to animate EQ gain. So let's animate EQGain like this. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan Amjed. This is the audio test. We are going to take this audio and we are going now, finally, I'm going to animate my fadal level, so I'm going to draw a shape like this. We are going to take this audio video, and we are at time, let's get started. So as you can see, my video is now fading out, so I can draw this. So this way, you can smoothly draw shapes. So without wasting your time, let's get. So this is how you can use automation for editing your audio. 97. How to Apply Effects With Bus Track: Welcome back, everyone. Now, what if you have multiple audio tracks, and you want to apply same effects onto those tracks? So the easy method is to use buz. As you can see, we have the bus track. First of all, we have to disable this, and I'm going to press key, hold it, drag this down, so we have a duplicate track. We have track number one and track number two. Now you can go to the Fairlight, go to Bz format. And now I'm going to add a bus. You can also change the type to mono as well. In bus number two, I can double click. I can name this bus to effxs. Once we done, we can simply click Okay. And now, as you can see, guys, this is number two track, number one track, we can drag this to the side, and this is buzz number two. Now we can click here. We can select Bz one. Once we select the bus one, what you can do. If you want to apply some effects, you can click here on the plus icon. For example, let's add distortion. Hi, and I can apply. One min. This distortion. And as you can see, if we play the audio an we don't have this distortion effect apply onto this audio because we have to assign this to the bus track number one in order to apply this effect to these tracks. Now to apply this effect, the bus two effect to first track, you need to go to track number one, which is this one. So it highlighted right here. Can simply click here, change this to effects. Let's change this to bus number one. We can also add this and select bus number one. Now you can simply click here. Now it will solo play this track, and it will mute this track. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan Now we can uncheck this and check this. Hi, everyone. As you can see, this torsion effect is only applied to track number one. If you want to apply the same effect to the second track, you can simply change the bus type to effects, which is our custom bus track. And if we select solo, Hi, check this out the same effect. Now we can change the first track to buzz number one, which is the original buzz which don't have any effect, listen to this. My name is Feza. Now we have normal audio. You can also mute your track, as well. Amjed. But if you listen to only one track and you want to mute all the tracks, don't mute every single track. Just unable the solo on the track you want to listen. And the other track will automatically will be muted at that time. Now we can simply go to effect. We can click here. We can close this. We can click here, and we can delete plugin. You can also add another effect, go to Reverb and I can click here. So we can select reverb I can select this, maybe make it a larger disable. And as you can see, the second track has this buzz which have the effect. So we can listen to that audio. This is the audio test. We are going to take this audio, and we are going to edit this audio. You can also apply this to the first one as well. And now we can listen to both. So let's listen to the first one. My name is. The listen to both. This is the audio test. We are going to take this. So this way, you can apply the same effects to all the tracks at once. 98. How to Record Audio: I. Welcome back, everyone. So how can we record audio in Fairlight? Well, it's very simple. As you can see, I have track number one, the audio number one, simply select this track, the first track, and in input, we have currently no input. You can click here, select input. Now, once you select input, as you can see, this is track left and right here, we can select this. I'm using this microphone so I can select this. I can patch. So now it connected this microphone to this audio track. Once we have done this, we can simply click here. And as you can see if we click here, enable this, now we can listen to my audio. Now to record your audio, you can simply click here. And as you can see, guys, we are recording audio in fear light. Hello, one, two, three, mic, testing, one, two, three. Hey, hello. If you want to stop the audio, simply press Spacekey and now it will stop recording. If you want to stop listening to your voice, you can simply uncheck this, and now as you can see, we don't have the voice. You can right click, do to clip operation, normalize your volume. And as you can see, guys, we are recording audio in fiaight. So this is how you can record your voice in feel light. 99. Add Free Sound Library: Hey. Welcome back, everyone. So, DaVinci Resolve has its own sound library. Let me show you how you can access to the library. Go to Sound Library, and as you can see, we need to download sound library. So we can click here. It will take us to this page. Now, once you fill your detail, you can go to license agreement, check this register and download. And now we have this file, and it will automatically download this sound library. Now, if your library stop downloading, then you can pause and you can resume the download, and it will start downloading your library. Once you have the library, extract the library, open the library, and you have to open this setup. Now, click on next. Now click Next check I accept the license next and install. Now, once it's complete, click on Finish, you can close and reopen DiwNGRsolve. Now go to Fairlight and go to Sound Library. As you can see, we don't have any library. First, we need to connect the sound library. Select the folder where you install your library. Once it's successfully scanned, click Okay, and as you can see, we currently don't have any result. Now to show all the library sounds, you can press Shift, hold it, and you can press number 83 time. And as you can see, we have 515 sounds. Now you can search for any sound as well. So I can search for light, and as you can see, we have 17 results for lights. Can select audio, press space to listen to the audio. Let's search for gear. We have this gear effect. We can search for fire. We don't have any effect for fire. Let's search for bird. So this is how you can use the sound library in Fairlight. 100. Edit Audio Using Fairlight: Welcome back, everyone. Now I'm going to show you how we can edit entire audio in feel light inside the veg resolve. First of all, hi, everyone. My name is Faizan. As you can see, we need to normalize the audio, so right click, go to clip operation and select normalized audio level. You can select true peak minus two normalize. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan now we can clearly listen to the audio level. Now, next, we need to double click on dynamics. This is the audio test. We need to add a limiter, and I'm going to set this right here so the audio don't cross the DV level so it won't hurt your ears. We can also apply a compressor and we can also apply this. We are going to take this hi one so this is before, so I'm going to select this focus mode, select this portion. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan Amjed This is audio test. We are going to take this. So as you can see, we make a little bit softer, so we can also add threshoold right here. We can also lower threshold and increase the ratio. Audio and we are going to edit this. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan Jed. This is audio test. We are going to take this audio. So as you can see, we have this nice audio. Now next we can double click on Q now in Q, enable Band one and Band six and track them right here. Now I'm going to play my audio and Hi, everyone, my name is As you can see, my audio is sitting right here. So we can track this right here. Is Faizan Now, by doing this, Jed you are removing unnecessary noise. This is audio test let me play my audio check this. We are going to take this audio, and we are going to edit this audio in DaVinci Resolve. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan Amjed now next, I'm going to select this graph. I'm going to drag this right here, drag this right here, increase the gain, and we can also increase the effect. Now I'm going to play my audio and I'm going to place it here and there to see where the audio is distorting. This is audio test. We are going to take this audio, and we are going to edit this audio in DaVinci Dissolve. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan Amjed This is audio test. Now I can track this down. We are going to take this. Now for number four, I'm going to do the same thing. Increase again, increase the effect. Audio, and we are going to edit this audio in Divinci Dissolve. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizanumjd. This is audio test. We are going to take this audio, and we are going to edit this audio Indivint Dissolve. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan. This is audio test. We are going to take this audio, and we are going to edit this audio Indivinc Dissolve. Hi, everyone. My name is as you can see, we make the audio cinematic. Faizan j This is before. This is audio test. We are going to take this audio and we are going to edit this audio. This is the audio test. We are going to take this audio and we are Now I'm going to select this one and I'm going to just increase again later bit of overall the graph from number five. We're going to edit this audio in DaVinci dissolve. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan Amjed. Now we can also go to the effts and I'm going to drag noise reduction. The audio test. We are going to take this audio and we are going to edit this audio. Now for the noise, instead of using the noise reduction in Dementia dsolve, you can go to podcast.adobe.com. This is the best for noise reduction and enhanced voice. You can upload your file from here, and then it will enhance your audio. Now, next step, we can go to the effect, go to the dynamics, and select multiband. Now in multiband, we have four bands, as you can see. And listen to the solo number one. So first of all, we need to select the audio. This is the effect, so we can click here. So as you can see in solo number one, we don't have anything. In number two, we have the audio so we can we are going to take this audio and we are going to edit this audio in the vents. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan I'm now we can uncheck this and now listen to the audio. This is the audio test. We are going to take this audio, and we are going to edit this audio Indivnttsolve. Hi, everyone. My name is Fez. This is before. This is the audio test this is after take this audio, and we are going to edit this audio Indivnt Dissolve. Now I'm going to drag my original audio, which is this one. And now, if we click here, solo, listen to the first audio. Hi, everyone. My name is Fezanumj. And now listen to the second, which is the edited version. Hi, everyone. My name is Faizan as you can listen, it is crispy clear. Now, if you record your videos, you have the same mic, same place, you don't have to do all these things again. What you can do, you can save this as a preset, and then you can apply these effects onto your audio in just one click. So let me show you how go to Fairlight, go to preset Library. Now click here and select Global Track preset. I'm going to select number one, Save New, and I'm going to name this voiceover dit. I'm going to click Okay. As you can see, this is there now we can go to the edit page, brag this and drop this right here. Or you can also go to the media. Now, what you can do, go to the Fairlight, go to the preset library, and go to the Global Track preset and you can select track number two and apply the same effects. And now check this out. So if we enable this. Hi, everyone. My name is FazanamJ. Now, all you need to do is just normalize audio. Everyone. My name is Faizan Amjed. This is audio tag and check this out. These are the same effects. So this is how you can edit your entire audio inside Fairlight. 101. Deliver Page: Introduction: Welcome back, everyone. Now we can export video through the Deliver page. We have a dedicated page for exporting video. But if you are in Edit page, you want to quick export your video, you can simply click here. Quick export. You can select your settings, and then you can export your clip. You can set your location, and then you can export your clip. Now let's go to Deliver page. And in Deliver page, you need to understand a few things before you use this page. Firstly, we have the preset. Now currently it is set to custom Export, but you can also change this. If you are exporting video for YouTube, you can select this. We also have resolutions right here. We have some other platform. If you want to use them, you can also do that. We also have audio only. Now, if you select this, as you can see, the video is unchecked and we can go to the audio and now we can export the audio. The audio is set to buzz one stereotype. So it will export all your audios. So let me show you what I mean. For example, I have multiple audio, so I'm going to drag this audio and I'm going to drop this right here. Let's drop this right here as well. And now, if we go to Deliver page, it will export all these audios. But if you particularly want to export only this video audio, what you can do, you can switch to timeline track and you can give the drag number. So this is track number one, two, and three. So I can select track number one, and it will only export this clip audio. No If you want to export all audios in the timeline, simply select all timeline audio. It will export all the timeline audio. You can also select this one. Now let's go back to video. Now if you switch to custom, still we don't have the video. So you have to manually check this. So this way, you can export your video as well. Now, next, we have filename. So this is where you can type your filename. So I'm going to type first render. You can select the location for this file. So I'm going to select this location, click on Save button. And next, we have the format. You can select your format. You can select your Codect and don't change the encoder. Just keep this to Auto. Now, right here, we have timeline resolution. So you can also customize your resolution from here as well. Right here, we have the timeline frame. So don't mess with this because if you mess with this, you will get a messy video. So let me show you what I mean. Now I'm going to mute this audio track. We can also select this one and we can check the solo. So this way, no matter if you select the old timeline track or the bus one, this way, you can mute the other two, and you only got this audio. If you set an audio to solo. Now my timeline frame, if we go to the file project settings, my timeline frame is 24. What if you go to Deliver page and you set your timeline frame to 30 and you have to add this to rendered Q. Now I can also change this to 23, which is the default. So let's go back to custom four, and now I can type 24 frame. And I'm going to also add this two rendered Q. Now, as you can see, by adding your render to Q, you can add multiple projects, multiple jobs in here, and then you can render them all at once. Now we have the quality preset, so don't change them, just keep this way where they are. And if you scroll down, we have export substitle. So for example, if you have some substitle so I'm going to go to titles scroll down, we have substitle. Going to randomly add some subs title, so we have subtitle. I'm going to duplicate this, so we have multiple subtitle. We have one, two, three, and we have number four. Now go to Deliver page and check export subtitle. You can export this as a separate file, and it will export ASRtfle. So you can also select rtfle and it will export. Can also import this file in Capcut in any video editing software. So you will have a separate subtitle file. Next, you can also burn into the video, so it will show the substitle in your video, so I can scroll up and I can type caption. Now add this to render Now, for example, if you want to change something in your render, don't close this job. So you can also close this. You can go to Edit, click here on the Pencil tool, and then you can update. So this is 30 frames, so I can update this to 30 frames. Once you've done that, you can update this job or you can add this as a new job. You can also cancel this as well. So I'm going to update this job. Next, we are done. So what you can do, you can select all these jobs and you can select render all. As you can see, it also shows us the preview, so I cancel my renders. And as you can see, it shows us the preview. So if you want the preview, simply click here. Go to Update during Render. Select minimal. Now, if you don't want the preview of your render, you can simply select off. And now we can select all these jobs, render all, replace. And now as you can see, we don't have any preview of any render. So all the videos are now export, so we can right click and open file location. Now we have the file location. This is 24, which is my original frame rate. We can open tier that you're about to witness And as you can see, everything is smooth. But if you select 30 frames about to witness is completely generated. As you can see, we have more jerky effect. So you will get these lines. As you can see, we have these tiny lines. So don't change your frame rate from the original source video. So if your video is 24 frame and you change the frame rate to 30 or 60, you will get these types of error. Where you have these tiny lines, let's play the video and see if we have more as you can see, after where my video and we have a blank screen. If we go back to the deliver page after my video, we have the audio, but we don't have the audio audio bull in the background. So if you have audio file and you export your audio file as a video, you will only have the audio and you have a blank screen. Now we also have this in and out range. So what you can do if you have a video and you want to keep this in the background, so let's delete them, and let's also delete empty. Now, for example, if you want to only export this part of your video, you can simply press I on the keyboard and you can press O on the keyboard. Once you've done that, go to deliver page and you have to select in and out range. If you select entire timeline, it will export all the video. So let me show you. So I'm going to select entire timeline. And I'm going to change my name to entire and let's add this as a job. Now we can also in Deliver page, press I on the keyboard and select any part of the video, and it will automatically change the render to in and out range. And now we can change this to range. Now let's add this. Now I can select these to export. While the video export, we can view the first render caption. So if you preview this clip, as you can see, we have these captions. Burn into the video. No more camera, no more crew, just you placed final, we have number four. And after that, we have a blank screen. So as you can see, the video is also render. This is entire timeline, and as you can see, my clip is ten second long. And this is in out range, and my clip is six second long. No more camera. Now, if you want to clear all the renders, you can simply click here and you can select clear render. And it will clear all the jobs that are rendered. So this is how you can use Deliver page of DaVinci Resolve. 102. Export Multiple Videos: Welcome back, everyone. Now I'm going to show you how we can export multiple videos all at once. So go to the edit page, click here and display tag timeline. Now we have the first clip right here. So now I have multiple clips. I'm going to add a new timeline. I'm going to drag this clip right here. In my third timeline, I'm going to drag this clip right here. We have four timeline, and finally we have timeline number five. Now simply go to Dever page, and as you can see, right here, we have five timeline. So what you can do, you can select a timeline, rename your clip. So I'm going to name this to number five. I'm going to copy this, and let's add this to Render Queue. Go to number four. We can name this to number four. Let's add this to Qu. Now, after you add all the timeline in the Render Queue, you can simply select the first one, scroll down, press Shift on the keyboard, hold it, and select the last one. This way, it will select all your jobs. And once you've done that, you can simply click here render all, and it will render all the video. Write A, it will also shows the size of each render. So as you can see, this video is 15 MB. Now we can also right click File Location, and as you can see, we have one, two, three, four and five. So this way, you can export your videos all at once if you have multiple timeline. Not only, this is the crazy feature, you can also export all the videos from all your projects. So let me show you what I mean. So now I'm going to create a project. So now I'm going to select this project. I'm going to delete all these videos now go to Deliver page. Now in my deliver page, we have to select export settings. So we also have to select the location for this render, and I'm going to name this to project 18. I'm going to add this to render Q. Now we can go back to the first project, and I'm going to name this to render one. So we have Project 18 and we have Render one. Now, if you add this to render Q, as you can see, we don't have the second project video right here. So to show that video in here, what you can do, you can simply click here and select Show all and it will show all the projects render plus the video that we want to render. If you clear all the render videos, simply click here, clear renders. If you clear all, it will clear all your jobs. We can also refresh, and we can also unable show jobs detail, and it will show all the jobs detail. Now I'm going to select Clear render, and now we have two video from different projects. This is Project 18 and this is for falte projects. So I'm going to select these two. I'm going to render. And before we render, it will ask us to save the project before we render. So we can click here to save. And now, as you can see, we are rendering this video. And now if we go to the file location for this render, this is Project 18, and this is second Project video. So this way, you can easily export multiple clips from different projects and from different timeline all at once. 103. Export Video With Transparent Background: Welcome back, everyone. So I have created this video, Light leaks in front of flat green screen at a comma, then I type ASED. Now I have used the new model of Google, which is Gemini Omni. And now, if we preview this clip, as you can see, we have light leaks in front of green screen. Now I'm going to show you another interesting feature of deliver page. What if you want to export this video with a transparent background? What if you don't want to remove the green screen every single time you reuse this asset? So let me show you how can we do that? First, you can download this clip from here. Once you download your clip, you can drag and rob this clip in timeline. Go to the Fusion page, and then you can search for ultra Keer. We have to add this between the nodes pressing Shift, and now we can connect change the screen to single, click here select the background. And we have this clip in front of transparent background. Now we can apply this effect on any video, but as you can see, we use ultra cheer. So DaVinci Resolve, have to process this ultra gear, and then it will add this video on top of your clip. What if you want to skip the processing? So this way, you have two benefit. First, you can use this without a background with a transparent background and second, DaVinci Resolve does not need to process this clip. Clip act as an individual clip, not as a fission clip. So go to deliver page and select Custom Export. You can rename your file. You can select file location, select individual clips. This is very important part. You have to select Quick Time in the format, and in Codec, you need to select AVID DNxHR. And in the type, you also have to select Avid DNx HR HQ 12 bit. Now, after this, you can check export Alpha. Now this is also very important part because without this, you can't really use your clip with a transparent background. Now I can add this to render queue. We can clear all the render, and now I can render this. Now, also, this is a ten second clip and check out the duration. This is 213 B clip. Now, once we export the clip, we can delete these because we don't need them anymore. Now, go to the file location, and this is the clip that we export. So I can drag this and I can drop this in my timeline. And now, as you can see, with a black background, we have this clip, but this is not a black background. So if I drag my clip and I can drop this clip in my timeline, I can drag this up. I can drag my clip right here. And as you can see, without any background, this is how light leaks work. Now to match the duration of the light leaks to the main clip, you can right click and select retime Control. Click here, you can trim. As you can see, it speed up the clip to match the duration. We can close this and we can also go to the composite mode and we can select screen. And as you can see, without any green screen, and the preview is running smoothly. This is the benefit of exporting your clip with a transparent background. To reuse this in every single project, you don't have to go to the folder. You just have to click here and unable Show Power Bins. Once you have the power bin, go to the Power Bin. So click here in the Master, right click and create a new bin, Double click, and we can name these two assets. We can go to the master of Bin. We can drag this asset in the asset folder. Now I'm going to delete these. Now I'm going to drag a new clip in my timeline. And let's go to the power bin master, go to the assets. And as you can see, we can re use this asset because we save this asset in the power bin. And we also have the compositing mode set to normal, so you can change this mode to screen and have a look. Isn't this amazing? Not only the asset, you can save your green screen videos as well. So I edited this video in Capcut and what if you want to use this in diventa dissolve? Now I it a green screen behind this video, so we can export this video with a transparent background, and we can reuse this in all our protect. Now I accidentally save this as an asset so we can remove this. You can go to the master Bin, and I also export this, and this is the video. And now I'm going to drop this in timeline delete this. And as you can see, without any background, this is the clip. If I drag my clip behind this clip, as you can see, we export this clip with a transparent background. We can re use this clip in the future projects without any background. And we don't have to process the background. And we also have a smooth preview. So this is how you can export your videos with a transparent background in DaVinci Resolve.